1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
158 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
161 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
172 by the \SpecialChar LyX
177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
179 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
180 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
181 Documentation mailing list:
182 \begin_inset CommandInset href
184 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Note Note
207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
208 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
209 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
224 LatexCommand tableofcontents
231 \begin_layout Chapter
235 \begin_layout Section
236 What is \SpecialChar LyX
240 \begin_layout Standard
242 is a document preparation system.
243 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
244 scripts, publishable books, business
245 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
246 It is unlike most other
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
254 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
256 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
272 pt type, left justified, 5
273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
282 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
286 \begin_layout Standard
287 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
292 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
296 \begin_layout Standard
301 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
302 's philosophy: most importantly,
303 the format of all of the manuals.
304 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
305 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
311 manual describes that, too.
314 \begin_layout Section
319 \begin_layout Standard
320 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
321 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
323 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
324 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
328 \begin_layout Standard
329 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
330 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
331 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
333 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
334 only a vertical scrollbar.
335 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
336 The first case is large images.
337 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
338 image and use the option
349 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
352 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
353 this doesn't work for equations yet.
356 \begin_layout Standard
357 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
358 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
366 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
373 \begin_layout Section
377 \begin_layout Standard
378 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
380 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
382 Just select the manual you want to read from the
389 \begin_layout Section
390 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
394 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
401 \begin_layout Standard
402 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
403 can be configured via the menu
405 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
409 \begin_inset Index idx
412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
419 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 packages are available.
423 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
425 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
427 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
432 \begin_inset space \space{}
435 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
436 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
438 To force \SpecialChar LyX
439 to re-inspect your system, you should use
441 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
445 \begin_inset Index idx
448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
449 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
455 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
456 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
459 \begin_layout Section
462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
464 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
473 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
474 installed, but you will not be
475 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
476 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
477 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
478 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
479 document can always be output as plain text
483 \begin_layout Standard
484 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
485 or DocBook classes or packages.
486 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
487 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
490 \begin_layout Standard
491 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
492 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
493 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
496 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
504 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
505 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
508 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
512 \begin_inset Index idx
515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
516 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
524 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
531 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
535 \begin_layout Chapter
536 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
540 \begin_layout Section
541 Basic File Operations
542 \begin_inset Index idx
545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
554 \begin_layout Standard
559 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
560 in addition to some more advanced operations:
563 \begin_layout Itemize
585 \begin_layout Itemize
601 arg "buffer-new-template"
607 \begin_layout Itemize
629 \begin_layout Itemize
637 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
641 \begin_layout Itemize
643 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
655 \begin_layout Itemize
667 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
671 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
681 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
715 arg "buffer-write-as"
719 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
723 \begin_layout Itemize
725 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
741 \begin_layout Itemize
755 \begin_layout Itemize
769 \begin_layout Standard
770 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
771 a few minor differences.
774 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
785 command lists the available templates.
786 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
787 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
788 and possibly propose text fragments
790 for the document, features
791 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
794 you would otherwise need to
795 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
797 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
801 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
805 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
813 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
819 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
820 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
824 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
832 \begin_layout Standard
833 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
865 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
866 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
867 is just that — a big, blank space.
875 \begin_layout Standard
896 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
901 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
904 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
922 will reload the document from disk.
923 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
924 and want to restore it to the last save.
933 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
934 them as your changes.
937 \begin_layout Section
938 Basic Editing Features
939 \begin_inset Index idx
942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
951 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
958 \begin_layout Standard
959 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
960 can perform cut and paste operations
961 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
962 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
963 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
964 editing features and how to access
966 We will start with cut and paste.
969 \begin_layout Standard
970 As you might expect, the
974 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
975 various other editing features.
976 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
980 \begin_layout Itemize
986 \begin_inset Index idx
989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset Index idx
1027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1056 \begin_layout Itemize
1062 \begin_inset Index idx
1065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1090 \begin_layout Itemize
1094 \begin_inset space ~
1100 \begin_layout Itemize
1104 \begin_inset space ~
1110 \begin_layout Itemize
1114 \begin_inset space ~
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1124 \begin_inset Index idx
1127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1136 \begin_inset Index idx
1139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1164 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1170 \begin_layout Standard
1171 The first three are self-explanatory.
1172 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1173 and other programs by
1194 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1195 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1200 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1201 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1202 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1203 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1204 into individual cells.
1208 \begin_inset space ~
1213 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1214 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1218 \begin_layout Standard
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1227 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1229 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1244 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1245 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1246 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1252 \begin_inset space \space{}
1255 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1256 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1262 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1264 \begin_inset space ~
1268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1282 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1284 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1293 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1294 start a new paragraph.
1295 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1296 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1304 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1318 \begin_inset space ~
1321 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1324 paste from the primary selection.
1325 This is normally the currently selected text.
1328 \begin_layout Standard
1331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1337 \begin_inset space ~
1345 \begin_inset space ~
1349 \begin_inset space ~
1355 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1361 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 button to skip the current word.
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1387 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1391 \begin_inset space ~
1396 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1398 If the toggle is set, searching for
1399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1410 will not match the word
1411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1425 Match whole words only
1427 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1428 to only find complete words, e.
1429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1458 offers also an advanced
1461 \begin_inset space ~
1465 \begin_inset space ~
1470 feature that is described in section
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1477 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1486 \begin_inset space \space{}
1490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1498 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1500 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1505 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1512 \begin_layout Standard
1516 arg "inset-select-all"
1519 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1520 When the cursor is inside an inset
1523 arg "inset-select-all"
1526 selects the content of the inset.
1530 arg "inset-select-all"
1533 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1538 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1541 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1545 \begin_layout Section
1547 \begin_inset Index idx
1550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1557 \begin_inset Index idx
1560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1569 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1579 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1585 or the toolbar button
1591 to undo some mistake.
1592 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1597 or the toolbar button
1604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1611 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1612 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1615 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1618 \begin_layout Standard
1619 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1628 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1629 This is a consequence of the 100
1630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1633 step undo limit mentioned above.
1636 \begin_layout Standard
1645 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1647 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1651 \begin_layout Section
1653 \begin_inset Index idx
1656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1665 \begin_layout Standard
1666 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1669 \begin_layout Enumerate
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1679 once anywhere in the edit window.
1680 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1684 \begin_layout Enumerate
1689 \begin_layout Itemize
1696 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1699 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1702 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1703 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1707 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1717 \begin_layout Enumerate
1718 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1722 \begin_layout Standard
1723 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1724 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1728 \begin_layout Section
1730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1732 name "sec:Navigating"
1737 \begin_inset Index idx
1740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1749 \begin_layout Standard
1751 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1754 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1760 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1763 \begin_layout Itemize
1764 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1766 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1773 or by the toolbar button
1776 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1782 \begin_layout Itemize
1783 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1785 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1788 and use the same menu to return to them.
1789 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1792 \begin_layout Standard
1796 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1801 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1802 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1804 \begin_inset space ~
1809 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1810 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1811 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1812 your last editing position.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1820 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1824 \begin_layout Subsection
1826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1828 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1833 \begin_inset Index idx
1836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1837 Navigating ! Outline
1843 \begin_inset Index idx
1846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1855 \begin_layout Standard
1856 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1857 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1858 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1860 \begin_inset space ~
1864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1866 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1870 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1877 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1882 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1886 \begin_layout Standard
1887 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1888 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1889 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1890 dialog and to modify the citation.
1893 \begin_layout Standard
1898 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1899 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1901 Labels and References
1903 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1912 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1915 \begin_layout Standard
1916 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1917 you further to control the display.
1922 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1923 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1929 option keeps it in the current view state.
1930 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1931 \begin_inset space ~
1934 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1938 3, the subsections of sections
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1942 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1947 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1952 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1962 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1965 \begin_layout Standard
1972 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1973 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1987 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1988 So, for example, you can move section
1989 \begin_inset space ~
1993 \begin_inset space ~
1996 2.4 or after section
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2002 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2015 (or the corresponding key bindings
2023 ) you can change the level of sections.
2024 So you can for example make section
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2033 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_layout Standard
2040 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2041 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2044 \begin_layout Subsection
2045 Horizontal Scrolling
2046 \begin_inset Index idx
2049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2050 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2060 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
2062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2066 \begin_inset space \space{}
2070 \begin_inset space ~
2073 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2074 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2075 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2079 \begin_layout Standard
2080 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2084 \begin_layout Itemize
2086 is used on a small tablet computer
2089 \begin_layout Itemize
2090 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2102 \begin_inset space ~
2115 \begin_layout Itemize
2116 Math constructs with long command names
2119 \begin_layout Standard
2120 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2121 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2123 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2124 windows so that table
2125 \begin_inset space ~
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2131 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2136 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2138 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2139 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2142 \begin_layout Standard
2143 \begin_inset Float table
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2151 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2156 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2160 Horizontal scrolling test.
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_inset Tabular
2171 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2172 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2174 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2217 \begin_layout Section
2218 Input/Word Completion
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2221 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2226 \begin_inset Index idx
2229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2236 \begin_inset Index idx
2239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2270 \begin_layout Standard
2272 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2274 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2275 is used to propose completions.
2278 \begin_layout Standard
2279 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2282 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2287 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset space ~
2303 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2307 \begin_inset space ~
2312 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2313 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2317 \begin_inset space ~
2323 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2324 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2325 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2326 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2329 \begin_layout Standard
2331 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2332 completions available.
2337 key to accept a proposed completion.
2338 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2339 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2340 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2347 \begin_layout Standard
2348 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2349 ing options for text.
2351 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2353 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2355 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2358 he special math option
2362 enables characters to be composed.
2363 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2364 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2367 , you can then input the characters
2368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2379 to a formula to get it.
2380 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2381 of the math toolbar.
2382 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2386 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2387 's installation folder.
2389 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2390 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2397 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2402 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2403 In the example above,
2408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2440 \begin_layout Section
2442 \begin_inset Index idx
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2452 \begin_inset Index idx
2455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2484 \begin_inset Index idx
2487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2518 \begin_layout Standard
2519 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2533 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2536 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2540 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2541 \begin_inset space ~
2545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2547 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2558 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2587 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2591 \begin_layout Labeling
2592 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2596 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2597 LatexCommand nomenclature
2599 description "Tabulator key"
2606 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2608 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2609 \begin_inset space ~
2613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2615 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2622 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2626 , especially section
2627 \begin_inset space ~
2631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2633 reference "subsec:Lists"
2639 If you are still confused, look in the
2644 \begin_inset Newline newline
2652 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2653 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2657 \begin_layout Labeling
2658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2662 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2663 LatexCommand nomenclature
2665 description "Escape key"
2673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2680 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2681 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2684 \begin_layout Labeling
2685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2691 \begin_inset space ~
2695 \begin_inset space ~
2702 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2703 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2707 \begin_layout Standard
2708 There are three modifier keys:
2711 \begin_layout Labeling
2712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2730 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2731 LatexCommand nomenclature
2733 description "Control key"
2738 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2739 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2743 \begin_layout Itemize
2752 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2755 \begin_layout Itemize
2764 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2767 \begin_layout Itemize
2776 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2780 \begin_layout Labeling
2781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2800 LatexCommand nomenclature
2802 description "Shift key"
2807 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2808 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2811 \begin_layout Labeling
2812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2830 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2831 LatexCommand nomenclature
2833 description "Alt or Meta key"
2838 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2839 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2840 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2846 \begin_inset Newline newline
2849 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2851 menu accelerator keys
2854 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2855 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2859 \begin_layout Standard
2860 For example, the sequence
2861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2867 \begin_inset space ~
2871 \begin_inset space ~
2877 \begin_inset space ~
2885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2904 \begin_inset space ~
2910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2925 manual lists all other things bound to the
2933 \begin_layout Standard
2934 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2936 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2937 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2938 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2939 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2940 The \SpecialChar LyX
2941 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2942 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2943 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2945 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2961 followed by a capital
2968 \begin_layout Chapter
2971 \begin_inset Index idx
2974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2984 \begin_layout Section
2986 \begin_inset Index idx
2989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2998 \begin_layout Subsection
3002 \begin_layout Standard
3003 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3004 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3005 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3006 numbering schemes, and so on.
3007 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3008 and format the title of your document differently.
3011 \begin_layout Standard
3016 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3017 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3018 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3019 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3020 picks one for you by default.
3021 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3024 \begin_layout Subsection
3026 \begin_inset Index idx
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3036 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3038 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3045 \begin_layout Standard
3046 You can select a class using the
3048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3049 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3053 \begin_inset Index idx
3056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3071 \begin_layout Standard
3072 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3077 \begin_layout Description
3078 Article for basic articles
3081 \begin_layout Description
3082 Report for basic reports
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Book for writing a book
3089 \begin_layout Description
3090 Letter for US-style letters
3093 \begin_layout Standard
3094 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3095 only uses if you have installed
3096 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3097 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3098 distributions will include
3100 Here are some of the classes.
3101 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3103 Special Document Classes
3112 \begin_layout Description
3113 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3116 \begin_layout Description
3117 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3121 \begin_layout Description
3122 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3126 \begin_layout Description
3127 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3128 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3129 There are three article layouts available.
3130 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3131 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3132 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3133 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3138 sequential numbering
3139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3142 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3143 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3144 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3145 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3148 \begin_layout Description
3149 Beamer Layout for presentations
3152 \begin_layout Description
3153 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3154 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3155 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3156 with \SpecialChar LyX
3160 \begin_layout Description
3161 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3164 \begin_layout Description
3166 \begin_inset space ~
3169 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3172 \begin_layout Description
3173 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3176 \begin_layout Description
3177 Foils Used to make transparencies
3180 \begin_layout Description
3181 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3182 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3183 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3184 with \SpecialChar LyX
3188 \begin_layout Description
3189 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3190 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3193 \begin_layout Description
3194 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3197 \begin_layout Description
3198 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3201 \begin_layout Description
3202 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3203 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3204 (Is used by this document.)
3207 \begin_layout Description
3208 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3211 \begin_layout Description
3212 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3215 \begin_layout Description
3220 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3221 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3223 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3227 \begin_layout Description
3228 Slides Used to make transparencies
3231 \begin_layout Description
3233 \begin_inset space ~
3236 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3237 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3240 \begin_layout Description
3241 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3244 \begin_layout Standard
3245 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3247 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3249 Special Document Classes
3256 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3257 of the document classes.
3260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3264 \begin_layout Standard
3265 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3268 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3270 \begin_inset Index idx
3273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3290 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3291 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3293 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3296 \begin_layout Standard
3299 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3304 , are highly specialized.
3306 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3307 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3308 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3309 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3310 by some document class.
3311 There are just too many of them.
3312 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3324 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3325 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3326 document class for a new file.
3328 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3331 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3338 manual for information on how to install them.
3339 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3345 \begin_layout Standard
3346 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3347 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3348 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3349 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3350 class files to be used for dissertation
3351 s submitted to those universities.
3352 The \SpecialChar LyX
3353 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3355 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3359 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3365 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3368 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3372 name "subsec:Modules"
3377 \begin_inset Index idx
3380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3391 chosen document class.
3392 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3393 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3400 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3404 \begin_inset Index idx
3407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3414 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3418 \begin_layout Standard
3419 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3420 packages or file format converters that are not always
3421 installed by default.
3423 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3424 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3425 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3426 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3428 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3429 file without the missing prerequisites.
3430 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3431 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3438 \begin_inset Index idx
3441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3442 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3448 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3453 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3456 \begin_layout Standard
3457 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3465 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3467 will advise you about these things.
3475 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3479 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3484 \begin_inset Index idx
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 Document ! Local Layout
3496 \begin_layout Standard
3497 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3498 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3499 : They are intended to be used in
3500 a variety of different documents.
3501 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3502 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3503 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3504 need a specific inset or
3505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3510 style only that one time.
3511 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3513 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3531 manual for information on how to use it.
3534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3538 \begin_layout Standard
3539 Each class has a default set of options.
3540 Here's a quick table describing them:
3543 \begin_layout Standard
3544 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3550 \begin_layout Standard
3552 \begin_inset Tabular
3553 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3554 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3558 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3559 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4013 \begin_layout Standard
4014 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4020 \begin_layout Standard
4021 You're probably also wondering what
4022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4026 \begin_inset space ~
4030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4034 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4035 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4040 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4045 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4055 headings, there are also
4063 headings, and so on.
4064 We will describe these headings fully in section
4065 \begin_inset space ~
4069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4071 reference "subsec:Headings"
4078 \begin_layout Subsection
4080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4082 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4087 \begin_inset Index idx
4090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4097 \begin_inset Index idx
4100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4109 \begin_layout Standard
4110 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4112 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4119 \begin_inset space ~
4127 \begin_inset space ~
4132 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4134 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4135 doesn't support special options you want to
4136 use for your document.
4137 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4138 -class and its options, you have to read
4142 \begin_layout Standard
4146 \begin_inset space ~
4153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4159 \begin_inset space ~
4164 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4165 You can choose between the following five options:
4168 \begin_layout Labeling
4169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4174 Use default page style of current class.
4177 \begin_layout Labeling
4178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4183 No page numbers or headings.
4186 \begin_layout Labeling
4187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4195 \begin_layout Labeling
4196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4201 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4202 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4203 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4204 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4207 \begin_layout Labeling
4208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4213 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4214 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4220 \begin_inset Index idx
4223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4231 How they are defined is explained in section
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4238 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4245 \begin_layout Standard
4246 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4247 \begin_inset space ~
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4253 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4260 \begin_layout Subsection
4261 Paper Size and Orientation
4262 \begin_inset Index idx
4265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 Document ! Paper size
4272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4274 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 You can find the following options in the menu
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4296 \begin_inset Index idx
4299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4308 \begin_layout Labeling
4309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4313 \begin_inset space ~
4318 What size paper to print on.
4323 \begin_layout Itemize
4329 \begin_layout Itemize
4335 \begin_layout Itemize
4341 \begin_layout Itemize
4347 \begin_layout Itemize
4350 US letter, US legal, US executive
4353 \begin_layout Itemize
4359 \begin_layout Itemize
4366 \begin_layout Labeling
4367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4372 To choose whether to output as
4383 \begin_layout Labeling
4384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4388 \begin_inset space ~
4393 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4394 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4397 \begin_layout Subsection
4399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4401 name "subsec:Margins"
4406 \begin_inset Index idx
4409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4428 \begin_layout Standard
4429 Paper margins are set in the menu
4431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4448 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4449 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4450 the paper format and the font size into account.
4453 \begin_layout Subsection
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4464 That includes the paragraph environments.
4465 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4466 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4467 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4469 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4478 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4480 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4481 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4482 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4485 \begin_layout Section
4486 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4487 \begin_inset Index idx
4490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4491 Paragraph ! Indentation
4499 \begin_layout Subsection
4501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4503 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4510 \begin_layout Standard
4511 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4512 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4515 \begin_layout Standard
4516 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4517 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4518 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4519 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4523 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4529 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4530 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4531 language than English.
4533 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4537 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4538 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4539 into \SpecialChar LyX
4541 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4544 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4546 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4547 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4548 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4555 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4556 goes to produce a printable file.
4561 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4563 gives you the ability globally to change
4567 these pre-coded spacings.
4568 We will explain more later.
4571 \begin_layout Subsection
4572 Paragraph Separation
4573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4575 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4580 \begin_inset Index idx
4583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4584 Paragraph ! Separation
4592 \begin_layout Standard
4600 \begin_inset space ~
4608 \begin_inset space ~
4615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4619 \begin_inset Index idx
4622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4635 \begin_layout Standard
4636 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4639 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4641 \begin_inset space ~
4646 dialog and toggle the
4649 \begin_inset space ~
4654 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4657 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4661 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4662 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4666 \begin_layout Standard
4667 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4668 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4671 \begin_layout Subsection
4673 \begin_inset Index idx
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4677 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4685 \begin_layout Standard
4688 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4692 \begin_inset Index idx
4695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4704 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4708 \begin_inset space ~
4717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4718 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4724 \begin_inset Index idx
4727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4734 installed to use this feature.
4739 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4743 \begin_inset space ~
4748 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4749 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4752 \begin_layout Section
4753 Paragraph Environments
4754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4756 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4761 \begin_inset Index idx
4764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4765 Paragraph ! Environments
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Paragraph environments|(
4783 \begin_layout Subsection
4787 \begin_layout Standard
4788 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4791 \begin_layout Standard
4800 } \SpecialChar ldots
4810 \begin_inset Newline newline
4813 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4815 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4816 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4817 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4826 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 A paragraph environment is simply a
4831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4838 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4839 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4840 scheme, labels, and so on.
4841 Additionally, you can
4842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4849 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4850 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4851 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4852 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4854 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4856 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4859 \begin_layout Standard
4860 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4861 \begin_inset Graphics
4862 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4868 at the left end of the toolbar.
4870 will change the environment of the
4874 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4875 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4876 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4889 create a new paragraph using the
4893 paragraph environment.
4895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4902 because if you are in one of these environments:
4905 \begin_layout Itemize
4911 \begin_layout Itemize
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4923 \begin_layout Itemize
4929 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4941 \begin_layout Itemize
4947 \begin_layout Standard
4949 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4953 , rather than resetting it to
4958 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4959 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4965 reference "sec:Nesting"
4972 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_layout Standard
4977 The default paragraph environment is
4982 It creates a plain paragraph.
4984 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4985 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4986 this manual) are in the
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 You can nest a paragraph using the
4998 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5006 \begin_layout Subsection
5008 \begin_inset Index idx
5011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5020 \begin_layout Standard
5021 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5022 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5031 for thanks or contact information.
5032 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5033 places all of this on a separate page
5034 along with today's date.
5035 For other types of documents, the title
5036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5043 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5049 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5063 Here's how you use them:
5066 \begin_layout Itemize
5067 Put the title of your document in the
5074 \begin_layout Itemize
5075 Put the author name in the
5082 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5084 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5090 Note that using this environment is optional.
5091 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5092 will automatically insert today's date.
5093 If you don't want a date, use the option
5095 Suppress default date on front page
5099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5102 \begin_inset space ~
5110 \begin_layout Standard
5111 You can use footnotes to insert
5112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5119 or contact information.
5122 \begin_layout Subsection
5124 \begin_inset Index idx
5127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5136 name "subsec:Headings"
5143 \begin_layout Standard
5144 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5146 takes care of the numbering for you.
5149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5151 \begin_inset Index idx
5154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5155 Section headings ! Numbered
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5164 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5168 \begin_layout Enumerate
5174 \begin_layout Enumerate
5180 \begin_layout Enumerate
5186 \begin_layout Enumerate
5192 \begin_layout Enumerate
5198 \begin_layout Enumerate
5204 \begin_layout Enumerate
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5212 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5213 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5214 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5218 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5219 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5220 You group the book into chapters.
5222 does a similar grouping:
5225 \begin_layout Itemize
5230 is divided into either
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5253 \begin_layout Itemize
5265 \begin_layout Itemize
5277 \begin_layout Itemize
5289 \begin_layout Itemize
5301 \begin_layout Standard
5302 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5310 Not all document types use the
5314 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5319 is the top-level heading.
5327 \begin_layout Standard
5332 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5333 labels it with its number,
5334 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5336 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5350 \begin_inset Index idx
5353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5354 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5363 The unnumbered section headings have a
5364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5371 at the end of their name.
5372 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5373 the table of contents, see section
5374 \begin_inset space ~
5378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5388 Changing the Numbering
5389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5391 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5398 \begin_layout Standard
5399 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5400 in the Table of Contents.
5401 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5403 Just as certain classes start with
5417 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5427 This is something you can change.
5430 \begin_layout Standard
5433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5437 \begin_inset Index idx
5440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5449 \begin_inset space ~
5453 \begin_inset space ~
5458 you will see two counters.
5463 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5464 numbers a section heading.
5465 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5469 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5470 Short Titles of Headings
5471 \begin_inset Index idx
5474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5475 Section headings ! Short titles
5481 \begin_inset Argument 1
5484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5493 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5502 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5503 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5504 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5507 \begin_layout Standard
5509 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5510 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5511 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5512 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5517 \begin_inset space ~
5523 This will insert a box labeled
5524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5528 \begin_inset space ~
5532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5535 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5536 This also works for captions inside floats.
5537 There can only be one short title per title.
5540 \begin_layout Standard
5541 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5548 \begin_layout Standard
5549 The following information applies to all section headings:
5552 \begin_layout Itemize
5553 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5556 \begin_layout Itemize
5557 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5560 \begin_layout Itemize
5561 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5564 \begin_layout Itemize
5565 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5568 \begin_layout Subsection
5572 \begin_layout Standard
5574 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5588 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5589 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5590 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5591 the text they contain.
5592 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5600 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5603 \begin_layout Standard
5604 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5613 when you start a new paragraph.
5614 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5618 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5619 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5620 have to change back to the
5624 environment yourself.
5627 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5636 \begin_inset Index idx
5639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5648 \begin_layout Standard
5649 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5650 time for the differences.
5659 are identical except for one difference:
5663 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5672 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5675 \begin_layout Standard
5676 Here's an example of the
5689 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5691 See – no indentation!
5695 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5696 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5697 the other paragraph.
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5701 Here's another example, this time in the
5708 \begin_layout Quotation
5714 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5715 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5716 the first line, then
5720 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5724 you were quoting other text.
5727 \begin_layout Quotation
5728 Here's a new paragraph.
5729 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5730 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5733 \begin_layout Standard
5734 As the examples show,
5738 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5739 They should put quotes in the
5744 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5748 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5753 \begin_inset Index idx
5756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5763 \begin_inset Index idx
5766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5787 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5793 \begin_inset Newline newline
5796 Which I did not rehearse!
5800 It could be much worse.
5801 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5803 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5804 indented a bit more than the first.
5805 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5811 \begin_inset Newline newline
5814 And make things look fine
5815 \begin_inset Newline newline
5821 arg "newline-insert newline"
5827 \begin_layout Standard
5832 does not indent both margins.
5833 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5834 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5837 arg "newline-insert newline"
5843 \begin_layout Subsection
5845 \begin_inset Index idx
5848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5864 \begin_layout Standard
5866 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5876 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5877 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5886 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5887 lets you provide your own label.
5888 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5889 describing some general features of all four of them.
5892 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5899 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5900 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5909 reset the environment to
5913 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5914 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5915 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5919 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5923 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5930 \begin_layout Standard
5931 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5932 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5933 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5935 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5936 you read all of section
5937 \begin_inset space ~
5941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5943 reference "sec:Nesting"
5950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5952 \begin_inset Index idx
5955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5962 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5971 \begin_layout Standard
5972 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5976 paragraph environment.
5977 It has the following properties:
5980 \begin_layout Itemize
5981 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5985 \begin_layout Itemize
5987 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5990 \begin_layout Itemize
5991 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5995 \begin_layout Itemize
5996 The items can have any length.
5998 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5999 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6006 \begin_layout Itemize
6011 environment inside another
6015 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6019 \begin_layout Itemize
6020 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6023 \begin_layout Itemize
6025 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6028 \begin_layout Itemize
6030 \begin_inset space ~
6034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6036 reference "sec:Nesting"
6040 for a full explanation of nesting.
6044 \begin_layout Standard
6045 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6054 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6057 \begin_layout Standard
6058 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6059 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6062 \begin_layout Itemize
6063 The label for the first level
6067 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6071 \begin_layout Itemize
6072 The label for the second level is a dash.
6076 \begin_layout Itemize
6077 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6081 \begin_layout Itemize
6082 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6086 \begin_layout Itemize
6087 Back out to the third level.
6091 \begin_layout Itemize
6092 Back to the second level.
6096 \begin_layout Itemize
6097 Back to the outermost level.
6100 \begin_layout Standard
6101 These are the default labels for an
6106 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6111 dialog in the submenu
6116 \begin_inset Index idx
6119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6125 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6129 \begin_layout Standard
6130 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6131 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6133 \begin_inset space ~
6137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6139 reference "sec:Nesting"
6146 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6148 \begin_inset Index idx
6151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6160 name "sec:Enumerate"
6167 \begin_layout Standard
6172 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6173 It has these properties:
6176 \begin_layout Enumerate
6177 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6181 \begin_layout Enumerate
6182 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6186 \begin_layout Enumerate
6188 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6191 \begin_layout Enumerate
6196 environment resets the counter to one.
6199 \begin_layout Enumerate
6212 \begin_layout Enumerate
6213 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6214 Items can have any length.
6217 \begin_layout Enumerate
6218 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6221 \begin_layout Enumerate
6222 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6225 \begin_layout Enumerate
6226 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6230 \begin_layout Standard
6239 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6241 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6242 labels the four different levels in an
6249 \begin_layout Enumerate
6250 The first level of an
6254 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6258 \begin_layout Enumerate
6259 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6263 \begin_layout Enumerate
6264 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6268 \begin_layout Enumerate
6269 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6272 \begin_layout Enumerate
6273 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6278 \begin_layout Enumerate
6279 Back to the third level
6283 \begin_layout Enumerate
6284 Back to the second level.
6288 \begin_layout Enumerate
6289 Back to the outermost level.
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6293 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6297 environment, see section
6298 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6304 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6309 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is more to nesting
6318 environments than we've stated here.
6319 You should read section
6320 \begin_inset space ~
6324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6326 reference "sec:Nesting"
6330 to learn more about nesting.
6333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6335 \begin_inset Index idx
6338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6348 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6352 list has no fixed label.
6353 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6362 of the first line as the label.
6366 \begin_layout Description
6367 Example: This is an example of the
6374 \begin_layout Standard
6376 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6380 \begin_layout Standard
6382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6389 it is meant that the first usage of the
6393 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6395 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6403 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6408 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6409 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6411 \begin_inset space ~
6417 \begin_inset space ~
6421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6423 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6427 for more information.) Here is an example:
6430 \begin_layout Description
6432 \begin_inset space ~
6435 Example: This one shows how to use a
6438 \begin_inset space ~
6450 \begin_layout Description
6451 Usage: You should use the
6455 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6456 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6458 It's not a good idea to use a
6462 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6463 You're better off using
6475 paragraphs into them.
6478 \begin_layout Description
6479 Nesting: You can nest
6483 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6487 \begin_layout Standard
6488 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6489 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6490 them from the first line.
6493 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6495 \begin_inset Index idx
6498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6512 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6513 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6526 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6528 Here are its properties:
6531 \begin_layout Labeling
6532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6534 \begin_inset space ~
6537 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6546 of each line as the item label.
6551 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6552 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6553 space as described above.
6556 \begin_layout Labeling
6557 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6558 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6559 uses different margins for the item label and the
6560 body of the item text.
6561 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6562 label width plus a little extra space.
6566 \begin_layout Labeling
6567 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6572 width \SpecialChar LyX
6573 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6574 If the label width is larger, the label
6575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6582 into the first line.
6583 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6584 margin of the rest of the item text.
6587 \begin_layout Labeling
6588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6593 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6598 environment has the same left margin.
6599 \begin_inset Newline newline
6602 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6605 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6607 \begin_inset space ~
6612 dialog (toolbar button
6615 arg "layout-paragraph"
6622 \begin_inset space ~
6627 determines the default label width.
6628 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6637 multiple times instead.
6638 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6648 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6651 \begin_inset space ~
6656 every time you alter a label in a
6661 \begin_inset Newline newline
6664 The predefined default width is the length of
6665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6673 \begin_inset space ~
6679 \begin_layout Standard
6684 list the same way as the
6688 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6694 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6703 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6704 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6706 \begin_inset space ~
6710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6712 reference "sec:Nesting"
6716 to learn about nesting.
6719 \begin_layout Standard
6720 There is yet another feature of the
6724 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6725 left-justifies the item labels by
6727 You can use additional
6731 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6732 justifies the item label.
6737 are documented in section
6738 \begin_inset space ~
6742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6744 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6749 Here are some examples:
6752 \begin_layout Labeling
6753 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6754 Left The default for
6761 \begin_layout Labeling
6762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6763 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6770 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6773 \begin_layout Labeling
6774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6775 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6779 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6786 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6789 \begin_layout Subsection
6791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6793 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6798 \begin_inset Index idx
6801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6810 \begin_layout Standard
6811 The features described in this section require that the module
6813 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6815 is loaded in the document settings.
6816 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6822 \begin_inset Index idx
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6836 Custom Enumerate Lists
6837 \begin_inset Index idx
6840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6841 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6849 \begin_layout Standard
6851 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6857 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6858 There you add the command
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6882 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6883 Code, look at section
6884 \begin_inset space ~
6888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6890 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6903 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6910 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6911 For capital Roman numerals replace
6923 in the command above.
6924 For Arabic numerals use
6932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6939 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6954 \begin_layout Standard
6956 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6964 You can only number 26
6965 \begin_inset space ~
6968 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6978 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6981 \begin_layout Standard
6982 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6985 \begin_layout Enumerate
6986 \begin_inset Argument 1
6989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7015 \begin_layout Enumerate
7016 \begin_inset Argument 1
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 \begin_layout Enumerate
7047 \begin_layout Enumerate
7048 \begin_inset Argument 1
7051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7075 \begin_layout Enumerate
7076 \begin_inset Argument 1
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7106 For this list these commands were used:
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7120 \begin_inset Newline newline
7128 \begin_inset Newline newline
7136 \begin_inset Newline newline
7146 \begin_layout Standard
7153 makes the label emphasized and
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7172 lists until you change the definition.
7180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7182 \begin_inset Index idx
7185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7194 \begin_layout Standard
7195 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7198 \begin_layout Enumerate
7199 \begin_inset Argument 1
7202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7221 \begin_inset Note Note
7224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 goes back to default numbering
7233 \begin_layout Enumerate
7237 \begin_layout Standard
7241 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7245 \begin_layout Standard
7246 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7251 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7252 to indicate that it is a resumed
7253 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7254 , but in the output.
7257 \begin_layout Standard
7258 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7275 \begin_layout Standard
7276 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7278 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7279 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7280 of a normal enumeration.
7281 There, insert the command
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7290 \begin_layout Standard
7295 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7299 \begin_layout Enumerate
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 \begin_layout Standard
7308 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7311 \begin_layout Enumerate
7312 \begin_inset Argument 1
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 This enumeration starts at 4
7334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7336 \begin_inset Index idx
7339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7349 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7351 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7354 \begin_layout Itemize
7358 \begin_layout Itemize
7359 with standard spacing
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7363 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7365 Add there the command
7369 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7372 \begin_layout Itemize
7373 \begin_inset Argument 1
7376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 \begin_layout Itemize
7399 \begin_layout Itemize
7403 \begin_layout Standard
7404 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7411 \begin_inset Index idx
7414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7422 For more information see its documentation,
7423 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7433 \begin_layout Standard
7434 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7436 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7437 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7441 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7444 \begin_layout Enumerate
7445 \begin_inset Argument 1
7448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7456 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7469 \begin_layout Enumerate
7470 with negative indentation
7473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7474 Further Customization
7475 \begin_inset Index idx
7478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7479 Lists ! Customization
7487 \begin_layout Standard
7488 You can also change the style of description lists.
7492 \begin_layout Standard
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7499 changes the description label font, the command
7502 \begin_layout Standard
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 sets the list style.
7512 \begin_layout Standard
7513 An example where the command
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7521 itshape, style=nextline
7524 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_layout Description
7530 \begin_inset space ~
7534 \begin_inset Argument 1
7537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7545 itshape, style=nextline
7555 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7556 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7560 \begin_layout Description
7562 \begin_inset space ~
7565 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7566 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7567 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7570 \begin_layout Standard
7571 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7577 \begin_inset Index idx
7580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7588 For more information see its documentation
7589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7599 \begin_layout Subsection
7601 \begin_inset Index idx
7604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7613 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7615 \begin_inset space ~
7618 Address: An Overview
7621 \begin_layout Standard
7622 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7623 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7631 \begin_inset space ~
7637 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7638 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7639 gags on the document.
7640 In contrast, you can use the
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7652 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7653 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7657 \begin_layout Standard
7658 Of course, you're not limited to using
7665 \begin_inset space ~
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7679 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7680 some European academic papers.
7683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7687 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7699 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7700 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7704 \begin_inset space ~
7709 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7710 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7711 Here's an example of each:
7714 \begin_layout Right Address
7716 \begin_inset Newline newline
7720 \begin_inset Newline newline
7724 \begin_inset Newline newline
7727 When is it? What is today?
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7734 \begin_inset space ~
7740 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7742 the largest block of text on a single line.
7743 Here's an example of the
7750 \begin_layout Address
7752 \begin_inset Newline newline
7755 Where do I send this
7756 \begin_inset Newline newline
7759 Your post office and country
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7763 As you can see, both
7770 \begin_inset space ~
7775 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7780 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7781 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7787 This makes sense, since
7795 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7796 Thus, you have to use
7803 arg "newline-insert newline"
7808 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7809 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7811 \begin_inset space ~
7815 \begin_inset space ~
7820 ) to start a new line in an
7827 \begin_inset space ~
7835 \begin_layout Subsection
7839 \begin_layout Standard
7840 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7841 or list of references.
7843 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7848 \begin_inset Index idx
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7860 \begin_layout Standard
7865 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7866 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7867 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7868 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7882 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7883 The book document classes ignores the
7887 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7891 in a letter document class.
7894 \begin_layout Standard
7899 environment does several things for you.
7900 First, it puts the centered label
7901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7909 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7911 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7912 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7913 the subsequent text.
7914 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7916 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7920 \begin_layout Standard
7921 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7925 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7926 The new paragraph will still be in the
7931 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7932 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7935 \begin_layout Standard
7936 \begin_inset Float figure
7943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7945 \begin_inset Graphics
7946 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7954 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7959 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7980 \begin_layout Standard
7981 We would love to demonstrate the
7985 environment, but since this document is in the
7986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7993 class, we can't do this.
7994 We inserted it therefore as figure
7995 \begin_inset space ~
7999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8001 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8006 If you have never heard of an
8007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8014 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8019 \begin_inset Index idx
8022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8031 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8038 \begin_layout Standard
8043 environment is used to list references.
8044 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8045 only use it at the end of the document.
8057 \begin_layout Standard
8058 When you first open a
8062 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8063 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8079 depending on the document class.
8080 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8081 Each paragraph of the
8085 environment is a bibliography entry.
8090 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8091 Each new paragraph is still in the
8098 \begin_layout Standard
8099 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8100 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8102 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8104 handling, have a look at section
8105 \begin_inset space ~
8109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8111 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8118 \begin_layout Subsection
8119 Special Environments
8122 \begin_layout Standard
8124 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8125 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8133 \begin_inset Index idx
8136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8146 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8153 \begin_layout Standard
8159 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8161 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8166 key as a fixed whitespace.
8170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8183 \begin_inset space ~
8188 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8206 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8209 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8212 arg "newline-insert newline"
8229 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8230 So, when you finish using the
8235 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8236 Also, you can nest the
8241 environment inside of others.
8244 \begin_layout Standard
8245 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8248 \begin_layout Itemize
8252 arg "newline-insert newline"
8255 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8260 \begin_inset space \space{}
8270 arg "newline-insert newline"
8276 \begin_layout Itemize
8280 arg "newline-insert newline"
8290 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8296 \begin_layout Itemize
8297 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8298 You must put at least one
8302 in any line you want blank.
8303 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8307 \begin_layout Itemize
8308 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8312 since that will insert
8317 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8320 arg "self-insert \""
8326 \begin_layout Standard
8330 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8334 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8338 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8342 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8346 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8347 printf("Hello World!
8352 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8356 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8360 \begin_layout Standard
8361 This is just the standard
8362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8373 \begin_layout Standard
8379 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8381 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8382 as if you used a typewriter.
8383 \begin_inset Index idx
8386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8387 Paragraph environments|)
8392 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8395 Program Code Listings
8400 \begin_inset space ~
8408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8412 \begin_inset Index idx
8415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8424 \begin_layout Standard
8429 environment is similar to the
8434 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8435 computer console text.
8440 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8454 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8455 you can have empty lines.
8468 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 have a certain language and a text style
8472 \begin_layout Itemize
8473 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8474 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8475 and \SpecialChar TeX
8479 \begin_layout Standard
8480 Because of these properties
8484 works like a typewriter.
8488 \begin_layout Verbatim
8492 \begin_layout Verbatim
8495 The following 2 lines are empty:
8498 \begin_layout Verbatim
8502 \begin_layout Verbatim
8506 \begin_layout Verbatim
8507 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8517 environment is identical to
8521 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8522 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8529 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8533 \begin_layout Section
8534 Nesting Environments
8535 \begin_inset Index idx
8538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8539 Nesting ! Environments
8545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8554 \begin_layout Subsection
8558 \begin_layout Standard
8560 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8562 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8564 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8566 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8578 \begin_layout Enumerate
8582 \begin_layout Enumerate
8587 \begin_layout Enumerate
8591 \begin_layout Enumerate
8596 \begin_layout Enumerate
8600 \begin_layout Standard
8601 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8602 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8604 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8618 \begin_inset space ~
8622 \begin_inset space ~
8627 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8629 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8632 arg "depth-increment"
8638 arg "depth-decrement"
8652 arg "depth-increment"
8658 arg "depth-decrement"
8662 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8663 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8667 \begin_layout Standard
8668 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8669 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8670 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8671 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8672 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8675 \begin_layout Standard
8676 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8678 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8680 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8683 \begin_layout Subsection
8684 What You Can and Can't Nest
8687 \begin_layout Standard
8688 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8689 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8692 \begin_layout Standard
8693 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8694 than a simple yes or no.
8695 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 Completely unnestable
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8707 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8712 \begin_layout Standard
8713 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8714 environments have them:
8717 \begin_layout Description
8718 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8719 Can't nest into them.
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Description
8756 \begin_inset space ~
8759 Nestable You can nest them.
8760 You can nest other things into them.
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8776 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Itemize
8788 \begin_layout Itemize
8794 \begin_layout Itemize
8800 \begin_layout Itemize
8806 \begin_layout Itemize
8813 \begin_layout Itemize
8819 \begin_layout Itemize
8826 \begin_layout Description
8827 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8828 You can't nest anything into them.
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8850 \begin_layout Itemize
8856 \begin_layout Itemize
8862 \begin_layout Itemize
8868 \begin_layout Itemize
8874 \begin_layout Itemize
8880 \begin_layout Itemize
8886 \begin_layout Itemize
8892 \begin_layout Itemize
8898 \begin_layout Itemize
8904 \begin_layout Itemize
8910 \begin_layout Itemize
8914 \begin_inset space ~
8920 \begin_layout Itemize
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8936 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8946 \begin_inset space ~
8949 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8950 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8951 nested section headings violate this.
8959 \begin_layout Subsection
8960 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8961 \begin_inset Index idx
8964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8965 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8973 \begin_layout Standard
8974 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8975 affected by nesting anyhow.
8979 \begin_layout Itemize
8983 \begin_layout Itemize
8987 \begin_layout Itemize
8991 \begin_layout Standard
8993 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9001 Figures and tables in
9005 are not affected by this.
9010 Have a look at section
9011 \begin_inset space ~
9015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9017 reference "sec:Floats"
9021 for more information about
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9030 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9031 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9036 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9044 of its own, it behaves just like a
9045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9052 paragraph environment.
9053 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9058 Here's an example with a table:
9061 \begin_layout Enumerate
9066 \begin_layout Enumerate
9067 This is (a) and it's nested.
9071 \begin_layout Standard
9072 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9078 \begin_layout Standard
9080 \begin_inset Tabular
9081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9176 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9182 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 \begin_layout Standard
9187 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 This is (a) and it's nested.
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9201 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9209 \begin_inset Tabular
9210 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9211 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9314 \begin_layout Enumerate
9318 \begin_layout Standard
9319 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9327 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9335 \begin_layout Enumerate
9336 This is (a) and it's nested.
9339 \begin_layout Standard
9340 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9346 \begin_layout Standard
9348 \begin_inset Tabular
9349 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9350 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9351 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9352 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9437 \begin_layout Standard
9438 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9444 \begin_layout Enumerate
9446 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9453 \begin_layout Enumerate
9457 \begin_layout Standard
9458 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9464 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9465 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9469 \begin_layout Subsection
9470 Usage and General Features
9473 \begin_layout Standard
9474 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9475 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9484 is the innermost possible depth.
9485 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9488 \begin_layout Enumerate
9489 level #1 – outermost
9493 \begin_layout Enumerate
9498 \begin_layout Enumerate
9503 \begin_layout Enumerate
9508 \begin_layout Itemize
9513 \begin_layout Itemize
9522 \begin_layout Standard
9523 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9524 both of them in the example.
9525 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9535 For example, if we tried to nest another
9540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9547 , we would get errors.
9550 \begin_layout Subsection
9552 \begin_inset Index idx
9555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9564 \begin_layout Standard
9565 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9566 We have several examples of nested environments.
9567 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9572 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9575 \begin_layout Labeling
9576 \labelwidthstring MMM
9577 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #2-a This is level #2.
9589 We created it by using
9592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9598 arg "depth-increment"
9605 \begin_layout Labeling
9606 \labelwidthstring MMM
9607 #3-a This is level #3.
9608 This time, we just enter
9615 arg "depth-increment"
9619 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9623 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9629 arg "depth-increment"
9636 \begin_layout Standard
9641 environment, nested inside of
9642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9650 So, it's at level #4.
9651 We did this by entering
9654 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9660 arg "depth-increment"
9663 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9668 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9684 \begin_layout Standard
9689 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9692 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9698 \begin_layout Labeling
9699 \labelwidthstring MMM
9700 #4-a This is level #4.
9704 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9707 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9712 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9716 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9721 keep nesting things inside
9722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9733 \begin_layout Labeling
9734 \labelwidthstring MMM
9735 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9740 \begin_layout Labeling
9741 \labelwidthstring MMM
9742 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9743 and this is level #6.
9744 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9748 \begin_layout Labeling
9749 \labelwidthstring MMM
9750 #5-b Back to level #5.
9754 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9760 arg "depth-decrement"
9767 \begin_layout Labeling
9768 \labelwidthstring MMM
9772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9778 arg "depth-decrement"
9781 , we're back at level #4.
9785 \begin_layout Labeling
9786 \labelwidthstring MMM
9787 #3-b Back to level #3.
9788 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9792 \begin_layout Labeling
9793 \labelwidthstring MMM
9794 #2-b Back to level #2.
9799 \begin_layout Labeling
9800 \labelwidthstring MMM
9801 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9802 After this sentence, we will enter
9806 and change the paragraph environment back to
9813 \begin_layout Standard
9814 We could have also used the
9830 environment in place of the
9835 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9839 Example 2: Inheritance
9842 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9843 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9846 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9855 arg "depth-increment"
9859 \begin_inset Newline newline
9862 which, we will change to the
9870 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 environment, at level #2.
9878 \begin_layout Enumerate
9879 Notice how the nested
9883 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9887 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9891 \begin_layout Standard
9892 We ended this example by entering
9897 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9901 and reset the nesting depth by using
9904 arg "depth-decrement"
9910 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9911 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9920 \begin_inset Argument 1
9923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9924 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9933 This is level #1, in an
9937 paragraph environment.
9938 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9942 \begin_layout Enumerate
9947 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9953 arg "depth-increment"
9957 Now, what happens if we nest an
9961 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9962 label be? An asterisk?
9966 \begin_layout Itemize
9976 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9977 So, its label is a bullet.
9978 (We got here by using
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-increment"
9990 , then changing the environment to
9998 \begin_layout Itemize
9999 Here's level #4, produced using
10002 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10008 arg "depth-increment"
10012 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10017 \begin_layout Enumerate
10019 to get to level #5.
10020 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10025 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10029 , because we are in the
10037 environment (that is, it is an
10052 \begin_layout Enumerate
10057 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10058 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10062 \begin_layout Enumerate
10063 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10066 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10069 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10072 \begin_layout Enumerate
10076 arg "depth-decrement"
10079 to decrease the depth after the next
10082 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10091 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10096 \begin_layout Enumerate
10098 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10099 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10103 \begin_layout Enumerate
10104 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10113 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10118 reset the counter for the label.
10122 \begin_layout Enumerate
10126 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10132 arg "depth-decrement"
10135 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10136 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10137 into the twofold-nested
10145 \begin_layout Enumerate
10146 The same thing happens if we do another
10149 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10155 arg "depth-decrement"
10158 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10161 \begin_layout Standard
10162 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10167 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10178 The number of other
10182 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10189 The same rule applies for the
10193 environment, as well.
10196 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10197 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10200 \begin_layout Enumerate
10201 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10202 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10203 the same detail with how we did it.
10212 \begin_layout Standard
10220 arg "depth-increment"
10227 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10228 the example in parentheses someplace.
10229 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10230 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10231 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10235 \begin_layout Enumerate
10240 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10244 \begin_layout Verse
10245 Now we will add verse.
10246 \begin_inset Newline newline
10249 It will get much worse.
10250 \begin_inset Newline newline
10260 arg "depth-increment"
10270 \begin_layout Verse
10271 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10272 \begin_inset Newline newline
10275 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10276 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10290 \begin_layout Verse
10291 Here comes a table:
10295 \begin_layout Standard
10296 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10302 \begin_layout Standard
10304 \begin_inset Tabular
10305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10306 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10393 \begin_layout Verse
10397 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10407 arg "depth-increment"
10413 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 arg "depth-decrement"
10434 \begin_layout Enumerate
10439 : level #1) This is another item.
10440 Note that selecting a
10444 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10445 3 times to put the table inside the
10453 \begin_layout Quotation
10454 We're now ending the
10458 list and changing to
10463 We're still at level #1.
10464 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10465 The next set of paragraphs is a
10466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10473 We will nest both the
10480 \begin_inset space ~
10485 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10489 for the letter body.
10493 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10496 to preserve the depth.
10497 Remember that you need to use
10500 arg "newline-insert newline"
10503 to create multiple lines inside the
10510 \begin_inset space ~
10520 \begin_layout Right Address
10522 \begin_inset Newline newline
10525 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10526 \begin_inset Newline newline
10532 \begin_layout Address
10534 \begin_inset space ~
10540 \begin_layout Quotation
10541 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10545 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10546 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10547 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10548 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10549 as soon as possible.
10550 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10553 \begin_layout Quotation
10554 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10555 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10556 with your order, along with payment.
10559 \begin_layout Quotation
10560 We thank you again for your patience.
10563 \begin_layout Address
10565 \begin_inset Newline newline
10572 \begin_layout Quotation
10573 That ends that example!
10576 \begin_layout Standard
10577 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10578 gives you a lot of power with just
10580 We could have easily nested an
10601 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10604 \begin_layout Subsection
10606 \begin_inset Index idx
10609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10610 Nesting ! Separation
10616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10618 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10625 \begin_layout Standard
10626 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10628 For example you need two different enumerations:
10631 \begin_layout Enumerate
10636 \begin_layout Enumerate
10641 \begin_layout Enumerate
10645 \begin_layout Standard
10646 \begin_inset Separator plain
10652 \begin_layout Itemize
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10659 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10665 \begin_layout Enumerate
10669 \begin_layout Enumerate
10673 \begin_layout Enumerate
10677 \begin_layout Standard
10678 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10679 list item and use the menu
10681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10682 Separated <Name> Above
10686 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10687 Separated <Name> Below
10690 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10691 ) and before or behind it the
10693 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10696 \begin_layout Standard
10697 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10698 (red arrow in LyX).
10699 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10700 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10703 \begin_layout Standard
10704 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10707 arg "paragraph-break"
10714 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10717 \begin_layout Section
10718 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10719 \begin_inset Index idx
10722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10733 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10735 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10736 be broken at the end of a line.
10737 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10741 \begin_layout Subsection
10743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10745 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10750 \begin_inset Index idx
10753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10762 \begin_layout Standard
10763 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10764 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10765 ) not to break the line at
10767 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10770 \begin_layout Quote
10771 Further documentation is given in section
10772 \begin_inset Newline newline
10776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10778 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10786 \begin_layout Standard
10787 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10802 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10811 A protected space is set with
10813 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10814 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10816 \begin_inset space ~
10824 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10830 \begin_layout Subsection
10832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10834 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10839 \begin_inset Index idx
10842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10843 Spacing ! Horizontal
10851 \begin_layout Standard
10852 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10855 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 The length units are listed in Appendix
10860 \begin_inset space ~
10864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10866 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10875 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10877 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10882 \begin_inset Index idx
10885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10886 Spaces ! Inter-word
10894 \begin_layout Standard
10895 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10896 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10897 at the ends of sentences.
10898 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10899 automatically takes care about this.
10900 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10901 followed by a period; see section
10902 \begin_inset space ~
10906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10908 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10913 To insert a normal space, select
10915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10916 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10918 \begin_inset space ~
10926 arg "space-insert normal"
10932 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10936 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10941 \begin_inset Index idx
10944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10953 \begin_layout Standard
10955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10962 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10971 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10972 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10973 inside abbreviations:
10976 \begin_layout Quote
10978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10985 \begin_layout Standard
10986 or between values and units.
10987 Compare for example this:
10988 \begin_inset Newline newline
10992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Newline newline
10999 10 kg (normal space
11002 \begin_layout Standard
11003 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11006 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11016 arg "space-insert thin"
11022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11026 \begin_layout Standard
11027 You can also insert the following space types:
11030 \begin_layout Description
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11036 \begin_inset space ~
11039 space A line with a
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11044 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11048 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11051 negative thin space between the arrows.
11054 \begin_layout Description
11056 \begin_inset space ~
11060 \begin_inset space ~
11063 space A line with a
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11068 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11072 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11075 negative medium space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Description
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset space ~
11087 space A line with a
11088 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11092 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11096 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11099 negative thick space between the arrows.
11102 \begin_layout Description
11104 \begin_inset space ~
11108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11112 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11116 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11120 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11124 \begin_inset space ~
11128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11131 em) space between the arrows.
11134 \begin_layout Description
11136 \begin_inset space ~
11140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11148 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11152 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11156 \begin_inset space ~
11160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11163 em) space between the arrows.
11166 \begin_layout Description
11168 \begin_inset space ~
11172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11176 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11180 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11184 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11188 \begin_inset space ~
11192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11195 em) space between the arrows.
11198 \begin_layout Description
11200 \begin_inset space ~
11204 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11208 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11213 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11220 cm space between the arrows.
11223 \begin_layout Standard
11225 \begin_inset space ~
11229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11231 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11235 lists the different space sizes.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 \begin_inset Float table
11246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11247 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11252 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11256 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11266 \begin_inset Tabular
11267 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11268 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11269 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11270 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11386 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11390 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11545 \begin_inset Index idx
11548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11558 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11559 feature for adding extra space
11560 in a uniform fashion.
11561 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11562 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11563 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11564 equally between themselves.
11567 \begin_layout Standard
11568 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11571 \begin_layout Quote
11573 This is on the left side
11574 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11577 This is on the right
11580 \begin_layout Quote
11583 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11587 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11593 \begin_layout Quote
11596 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11600 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11610 \begin_layout Standard
11611 That was an example in the
11617 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11621 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11625 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11628 is one in a standard paragraph.
11629 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11633 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11636 \begin_layout Standard
11637 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11645 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11648 \begin_layout Standard
11650 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11654 \begin_inset space ~
11660 \begin_layout Standard
11662 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11666 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_layout Standard
11674 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11678 \begin_inset space ~
11684 \begin_layout Standard
11686 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11696 \begin_layout Standard
11698 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11702 \begin_inset space ~
11708 \begin_layout Standard
11710 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11714 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11721 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11729 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11733 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11735 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11736 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11740 option in the space dialog.
11748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11752 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11757 \begin_inset Index idx
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11770 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11771 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11775 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11778 What is correct English?:
11779 \begin_inset Newline newline
11783 \begin_inset Newline newline
11787 \begin_inset space ~
11790 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11791 \begin_inset Newline newline
11795 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 \begin_inset Newline newline
11810 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11821 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11827 \begin_layout Standard
11829 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11834 \begin_inset space ~
11838 \begin_inset space ~
11842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11846 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11849 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11853 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11859 \begin_inset space ~
11863 \begin_inset space ~
11867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11870 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11879 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11880 That is why it is named
11881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11889 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11890 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11894 \begin_layout Subsection
11896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11898 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11903 \begin_inset Index idx
11906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11915 \begin_layout Standard
11916 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11919 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11921 \begin_inset space ~
11927 There you find the following sizes:
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11943 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11944 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11949 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11954 \begin_inset space ~
11960 \begin_inset Index idx
11963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11964 Document ! Settings
11969 for the paragraph separation.
11970 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11981 \begin_layout Standard
11987 \begin_inset Index idx
11990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11996 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11997 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12002 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12003 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12012 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12021 s are described in section
12022 \begin_inset space ~
12026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12028 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12037 If there are several
12041 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12042 You can therefore use
12046 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12054 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12055 \begin_inset space ~
12059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12061 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12069 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12079 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12080 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12092 \begin_layout Subsection
12093 Paragraph Alignment
12094 \begin_inset Index idx
12097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12098 Paragraph ! Alignment
12106 \begin_layout Standard
12107 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12109 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 dialog (toolbar button
12115 arg "layout-paragraph"
12119 There are five possibilities:
12122 \begin_layout Itemize
12130 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12136 \begin_layout Itemize
12144 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12150 \begin_layout Itemize
12158 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12164 \begin_layout Itemize
12172 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12178 \begin_layout Itemize
12186 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12194 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12195 the left and right margins.
12196 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12201 This paragraph is right aligned,
12204 \begin_layout Standard
12206 this one is centered,
12209 \begin_layout Standard
12211 this one is left aligned.
12214 \begin_layout Subsection
12216 \begin_inset Index idx
12219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12220 Page breaks ! Forced
12226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12228 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12235 \begin_layout Standard
12236 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12237 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12238 force a page break where you want one.
12239 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12240 is good at page breaking.
12241 Only if you use a lot of
12245 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12246 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12249 \begin_layout Standard
12250 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12251 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12255 have to change the page breaking.
12258 \begin_layout Standard
12259 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12261 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12264 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 \begin_inset space ~
12272 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12275 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12282 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12284 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12285 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12288 \begin_layout Standard
12289 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12290 at the top of a page.
12291 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12293 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12294 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12295 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12299 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12303 to learn more about
12310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12314 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12319 \begin_inset Index idx
12322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12323 Page breaks ! Clear
12331 \begin_layout Standard
12332 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12333 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12334 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12335 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12336 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12340 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 \begin_inset space ~
12351 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12354 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12356 \begin_inset space ~
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12365 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12366 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12369 \begin_layout Subsection
12371 \begin_inset Index idx
12374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12383 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12390 \begin_layout Standard
12391 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12393 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12396 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12398 \begin_inset space ~
12402 \begin_inset space ~
12410 arg "newline-insert newline"
12414 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12417 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12419 \begin_inset space ~
12423 \begin_inset space ~
12431 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12434 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12436 This is useful to avoid
12437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12444 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12447 \begin_layout Standard
12448 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12449 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12451 very good at line breaking.
12452 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12453 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12454 \begin_inset space ~
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12460 reference "sec:Quote"
12465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12467 reference "sec:Verse"
12472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12474 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12481 \begin_layout Subsection
12483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12485 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12490 \begin_inset Index idx
12493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12502 \begin_layout Standard
12504 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12515 \begin_layout Standard
12519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12520 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12522 \begin_inset space ~
12527 you can insert horizontal lines.
12528 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12529 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12530 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12533 \begin_layout Standard
12535 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12546 \begin_layout Section
12547 Characters and Symbols
12550 \begin_layout Standard
12551 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12552 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12553 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12561 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12565 for information on how this is done.
12568 \begin_layout Standard
12569 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12574 dialog via the menu
12576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12577 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12583 \begin_layout Standard
12584 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12592 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12593 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12595 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12603 \begin_layout Section
12604 Fonts and Text Styles
12605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12607 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12614 \begin_layout Subsection
12616 \begin_inset Index idx
12619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12628 \begin_layout Standard
12629 There are two types of fonts:
12632 \begin_layout Description
12634 \begin_inset space ~
12638 \begin_inset Index idx
12641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12647 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12652 characters) in the font.
12653 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12654 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12655 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12656 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12657 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12658 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12659 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12660 \begin_inset Newline newline
12663 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12664 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12665 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12666 sizes than at small ones.
12667 \begin_inset Newline newline
12681 \begin_inset space ~
12689 \begin_layout Description
12691 \begin_inset space ~
12695 \begin_inset Index idx
12698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12704 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12705 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12706 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12707 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12708 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12709 image manipulation program.
12710 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12711 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12712 \begin_inset space ~
12715 pixels high up to 34
12716 \begin_inset space ~
12719 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12720 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12721 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12723 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12724 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12725 \begin_inset Newline newline
12728 Bitmap fonts are named
12731 \begin_inset space ~
12736 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12740 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12741 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12742 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12743 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12744 use scalable fonts.
12747 \begin_layout Standard
12748 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12754 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12759 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12760 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12761 font to emphasize text, you use an
12762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12770 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12772 In \SpecialChar LyX
12773 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12777 \begin_layout Subsection
12780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12782 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12789 \begin_layout Standard
12790 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12791 used its own fonts.
12792 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12793 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12796 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12797 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12798 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12799 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12800 to a word processor.
12801 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12802 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12803 files are very portable across
12804 different machines.
12805 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12806 has increased a lot
12807 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12810 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12812 \begin_inset space ~
12816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12818 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12823 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12824 code in the document
12825 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12828 \begin_layout Standard
12829 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12830 engines that are also able directly
12831 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12833 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12835 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12837 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12838 that is installed on your system.
12839 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12842 \begin_layout Standard
12843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12851 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12852 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12860 \begin_layout Subsection
12861 Document Font and Font size
12862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12864 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12869 \begin_inset Index idx
12872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 \begin_inset Index idx
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12891 \begin_layout Standard
12892 You can set the document fonts in the
12894 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12898 \begin_inset Index idx
12901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12902 Document ! Settings
12912 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12913 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12916 \begin_inset space ~
12925 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12927 \begin_inset space ~
12930 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12938 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12939 This requires that you use
12951 as the output format, i.
12952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12956 \begin_inset space \space{}
12959 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12960 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12961 installed (see section
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12968 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12973 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12975 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12976 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12981 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12982 cannot determine the family.
12983 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12984 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12987 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12990 \begin_layout Standard
12991 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12992 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12997 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13003 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13005 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13007 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13010 font encoding, this is
13011 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13012 , depending on the document language,
13015 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13016 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13040 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13041 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13049 \begin_inset space ~
13055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13063 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13084 European Computer Modern
13087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13095 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13098 \begin_layout Standard
13103 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13104 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13109 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13112 \begin_inset space ~
13117 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13123 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13124 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13127 \begin_layout Itemize
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13136 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13154 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13155 community in order to replace
13159 as the default font.
13160 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13161 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13164 \begin_inset space ~
13177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13178 One difference is improved kerning.
13186 \begin_layout Itemize
13187 If you do not like the look of
13195 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13200 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13216 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13217 \begin_inset space ~
13220 serif and typewriter fonts,
13224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13225 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13241 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13246 \begin_inset space \space{}
13254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13258 \begin_inset space \space{}
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13272 \begin_inset space ~
13282 but you can also select your own.
13283 \begin_inset Newline newline
13286 The differences between roman,
13289 \begin_inset space ~
13298 fonts are explained in section
13299 \begin_inset space ~
13303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13305 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13310 \begin_inset Newline newline
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13321 was originally designed for newspapers.
13322 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13323 into the small newspaper columns.
13327 \begin_inset space ~
13332 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13335 \begin_layout Standard
13336 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13349 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13354 depends on the class you are using.
13355 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13358 \begin_layout Standard
13359 Note that the font size is the
13364 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13365 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13366 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13367 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13370 \begin_inset space ~
13376 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13377 \begin_inset space ~
13381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13383 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13390 \begin_layout Standard
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13399 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13401 \begin_inset space ~
13404 serif or typewriter.
13409 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13419 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13422 \begin_layout Standard
13427 LaTeX font encoding
13429 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13430 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13436 \begin_inset Index idx
13439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13447 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13449 \begin_inset space ~
13453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13455 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13462 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13463 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13464 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13468 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13476 \begin_layout Standard
13477 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13479 Use Old Style Figures
13483 Use True Small Caps
13486 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13489 Use Old Style Figures
13491 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13493 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13501 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13505 Use True Small Caps
13507 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13508 of scaled capitals.
13509 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13510 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13511 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13515 \begin_layout Standard
13517 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13518 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13519 provided by the font package (or the
13523 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13528 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13534 \begin_layout Standard
13539 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13540 a font to display the script characters.
13544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13545 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13551 \begin_inset Index idx
13554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 So this has no effect for the document language
13577 \begin_layout Standard
13580 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13582 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13583 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13589 \begin_inset Index idx
13592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13594 packages ! microtype
13603 \begin_layout Standard
13606 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13608 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13613 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13614 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13620 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13621 \begin_inset space ~
13625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13627 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13637 \begin_layout Standard
13638 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13650 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13655 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13656 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13658 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13660 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13663 dialog, see section
13664 \begin_inset space ~
13668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13670 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13682 \begin_layout Subsection
13686 \begin_layout Standard
13687 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13688 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13690 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13691 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13692 choose a math font in the dialog
13694 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13698 \begin_inset Index idx
13701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13702 Document ! Settings
13708 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13709 automatically selects a math font.
13710 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13711 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13720 \begin_inset space ~
13726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13731 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13732 document font is available.
13735 \begin_layout Standard
13736 Note that the math font will not be used for
13740 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13746 or by the insertion of the command
13753 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13754 \begin_inset space ~
13758 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13759 while the math characters do not.
13761 \begin_inset space ~
13764 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13767 \begin_inset space ~
13775 \begin_inset space ~
13780 in the document font settings.
13783 \begin_layout Standard
13784 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13785 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13786 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13787 font (in most cases
13788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13794 \begin_inset space ~
13800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13803 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13804 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13812 \begin_inset space ~
13818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13824 \begin_layout Subsection
13826 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13828 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13832 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13836 name "subsec:charstyles"
13843 \begin_inset Index idx
13846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13853 \begin_inset Index idx
13856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13865 \begin_layout Standard
13866 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13867 automatically changes the
13868 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13871 style for certain paragraph environments.
13873 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13874 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13876 This is where we meet the concept of
13882 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13897 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13919 e., available with all document classes.
13920 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13924 for specific purposes.
13925 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13928 \begin_layout Standard
13930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13931 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13941 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13945 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13958 — you customized the
13963 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13964 among them, encourage the use of
13976 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13977 \begin_inset space ~
13981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13983 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13988 Rather than fiddling with
13992 , they encourage the use of
13996 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14001 \begin_inset Quotes els
14005 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14008 ), not their form (
14009 \begin_inset Quotes els
14013 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14017 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14018 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14019 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14020 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14021 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14022 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14028 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14032 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14033 With a semantic markup (such as
14037 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14042 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14044 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14045 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14048 \begin_layout Standard
14050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14051 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14052 by \SpecialChar LyX
14058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14060 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14061 Builtin Text Styles
14062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14064 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14071 \begin_layout Standard
14073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14074 The two builtin text styles can be
14075 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14083 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14084 both of these styles
14087 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14101 \begin_layout Standard
14106 style, do one of the following:
14109 \begin_layout Itemize
14110 click on the toolbar button
14119 \begin_layout Itemize
14120 use the key binding
14127 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14131 \begin_layout Itemize
14133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14141 arg "dialog-show character"
14147 arg "dialog-show character"
14150 ) as described in section
14151 \begin_inset space ~
14155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14157 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14166 \begin_layout Standard
14167 These commands are all toggles.
14172 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14175 \begin_layout Standard
14176 One typically uses the
14180 style for proper names.
14182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14189 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14195 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14199 \begin_layout Standard
14201 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14206 is producing text in
14210 , but the definition can be changed.
14215 \begin_layout Standard
14217 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14219 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14227 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14234 \begin_layout Itemize
14235 clicking on the toolbar button
14244 \begin_layout Itemize
14245 using the keybindings
14252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14256 \begin_layout Itemize
14258 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14266 arg "dialog-show character"
14272 arg "dialog-show character"
14275 ) as described in section
14276 \begin_inset space ~
14280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14282 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14291 \begin_layout Standard
14296 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14298 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14300 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14303 packages use a different font
14304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14305 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14311 \begin_layout Standard
14312 We've been using the
14316 style all over the place in this document.
14317 Here's one more example:
14320 \begin_layout Quotation
14324 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14332 \begin_layout Standard
14333 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14334 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14335 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14336 the common tendency to overuse
14337 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14344 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14348 \begin_layout Standard
14350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14351 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14352 only as font changes and integrated in the
14360 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14363 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14370 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14372 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14376 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14381 \begin_inset space ~
14384 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14392 arg "dialog-show character"
14398 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14400 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14406 arg "dialog-show character"
14410 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14420 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14427 \begin_layout Standard
14429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14430 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14432 \begin_inset space ~
14436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14438 reference "subsec:Modules"
14445 ), or local layout settings (see section
14446 \begin_inset space ~
14450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14452 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14457 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14461 markup for specific functions.
14462 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14467 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14477 \begin_inset Quotes els
14481 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14487 \begin_layout Standard
14489 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14490 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14498 \begin_layout Standard
14500 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14501 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14506 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14507 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14508 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14513 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14514 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14519 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14527 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14528 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14529 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14530 \begin_inset Flex Code
14533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14535 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14544 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14558 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14572 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14573 on screen their formal appearance.
14578 \begin_layout Subsection
14580 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14582 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14586 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14592 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14594 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14600 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14602 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14608 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14613 \begin_inset Index idx
14616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14625 \begin_layout Standard
14626 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14627 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14630 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14632 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14634 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14639 the properties of text passages
14640 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14644 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14645 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14646 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14647 from ordinary dialog.
14648 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14652 \begin_layout Standard
14654 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14655 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14656 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14657 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14658 the properties of the respective text passages.
14663 comes in as a last resort.
14668 \begin_layout Standard
14669 Before we document how to
14670 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14671 use custom character style
14672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14673 tweak the text properties
14675 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14676 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14682 \begin_inset Newline newline
14685 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14686 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14689 \begin_layout Standard
14691 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14692 use custom character styles
14693 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14694 tweak text properties
14697 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14700 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14702 \begin_inset space ~
14705 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14713 arg "dialog-show character"
14718 dialog or press the toolbar button
14721 arg "dialog-show character"
14726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14729 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14730 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14732 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14735 property that you can choose.
14736 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14739 \begin_inset space ~
14744 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14746 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14752 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14757 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14758 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14759 environments all at once.
14762 \begin_layout Standard
14764 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14766 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14769 properties, and their options (in addition to
14772 \begin_inset space ~
14778 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14790 \begin_layout Labeling
14791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14805 The possible options are:
14809 \begin_layout Labeling
14810 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14815 This is the Roman font family.
14816 Normally a serif font.
14817 It's also the default family.
14827 \begin_layout Labeling
14828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 \begin_inset space ~
14839 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14851 \begin_layout Labeling
14852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14859 This is the Typewriter font family.
14865 arg "font-typewriter"
14871 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14875 \begin_layout Standard
14877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14878 The general differences of these families are:
14881 \begin_layout Itemize
14883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14888 fonts use characters with serifs.
14889 These are the small
14890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14897 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14898 The following example shows the difference:
14899 \begin_inset Newline newline
14903 \begin_inset Newline newline
14908 text without serifs
14911 \begin_inset Newline newline
14914 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14915 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14922 \begin_layout Itemize
14924 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14929 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14930 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14931 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14934 \begin_layout Itemize
14936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14949 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14967 \begin_inset Newline newline
14971 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14987 \begin_inset Note Note
14990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14993 For more on phantoms see section
14994 \begin_inset space ~
14998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15000 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15010 \begin_inset Newline newline
15019 \begin_layout Labeling
15020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15025 This corresponds to the print weight.
15030 \begin_layout Labeling
15031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15036 This is the Medium font series.
15037 It's also the default series.
15040 \begin_layout Labeling
15041 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15048 This is the Bold font series.
15061 \begin_layout Labeling
15062 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15067 As the name implies.
15072 \begin_layout Labeling
15073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15078 This is the Upright font shape.
15079 It's also the default shape.
15082 \begin_layout Labeling
15083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15093 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15103 s the Italic font shape
15109 \begin_layout Labeling
15110 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15117 This is the Slanted font shape
15119 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15120 , this is different from italic).
15123 \begin_layout Labeling
15124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15128 \begin_inset space ~
15135 This is the Small caps font shape
15142 \begin_layout Labeling
15143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15148 Alters the text color.
15149 Note that not all DVI
15150 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15152 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15155 viewers are able to display colors.
15157 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15161 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15163 \begin_inset space ~
15170 , which means that the document default color set in
15172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15179 \begin_inset space ~
15185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15187 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15191 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15271 \begin_inset Index idx
15274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 \begin_layout Labeling
15284 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15289 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15290 the language of the document.
15291 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15293 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15296 in blue to indicate the change
15297 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15298 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15302 \begin_inset Newline newline
15305 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15307 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15308 When using the spell checking (see section
15309 \begin_inset space ~
15313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15315 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15319 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15320 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15322 \begin_inset Newline newline
15325 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15327 Exclude from Spellchecking
15330 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15333 \begin_layout Labeling
15334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15339 Alters the size of the font.
15341 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15347 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15350 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15351 document font size.
15352 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15353 the details, but a general description of what
15359 \begin_layout Labeling
15360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15381 arg "font-size tiny"
15387 \begin_layout Labeling
15388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15409 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15415 \begin_layout Labeling
15416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15437 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15443 \begin_layout Labeling
15444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15465 arg "font-size small"
15471 \begin_layout Labeling
15472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15486 It's also the default size.
15490 arg "font-size normal"
15496 \begin_layout Labeling
15497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15518 arg "font-size large"
15524 \begin_layout Labeling
15525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15546 arg "font-size larger"
15552 \begin_layout Labeling
15553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15574 arg "font-size largest"
15580 \begin_layout Labeling
15581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15602 arg "font-size huge"
15608 \begin_layout Labeling
15609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 arg "font-size giant"
15636 \begin_layout Labeling
15637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15642 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15662 arg "font-size increase"
15668 \begin_layout Labeling
15669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15674 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15694 arg "font-size decrease"
15701 \begin_layout Standard
15706 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15707 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15709 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15710 — use those instead.
15711 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15714 \begin_layout Labeling
15715 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15717 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15721 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15727 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15728 change a few other things at the character level
15729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15730 have text passages being underlined
15734 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15735 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15736 days, when you could not change fonts.
15737 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15738 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15739 because some people
15743 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15750 \begin_layout Labeling
15751 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15753 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15760 This is text with emphasize on
15763 This might seem like the same as
15767 , but it is actually a bit different.
15773 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15775 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15780 \begin_layout Labeling
15781 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15783 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15788 Don't use underlining.
15793 \begin_layout Labeling
15794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15796 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15808 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15810 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15819 arg "font-underline"
15825 \begin_inset Newline newline
15829 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15832 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15833 when you could not change fonts.
15834 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15835 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15836 because some people
15840 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15845 \begin_layout Labeling
15846 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15850 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15861 This is text with Double under
15862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15873 arg "font-underunderline"
15877 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15879 \begin_inset Newline newline
15882 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15883 about double underbar
15888 \begin_layout Labeling
15889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15893 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15904 This is text with Wavy under
15905 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15916 arg "font-underwave"
15920 \begin_inset Newline newline
15923 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15924 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15930 \begin_layout Labeling
15931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15933 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15938 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15944 \begin_layout Labeling
15945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15952 Don't use strikethrough.
15955 \begin_layout Labeling
15956 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15960 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15962 \begin_inset space ~
15966 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15974 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15977 Single strikethrough
15985 arg "font-strikeout"
15989 \begin_inset Newline newline
15992 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15993 changed in the meantime.
15996 \begin_layout Labeling
15997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15999 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16003 \begin_inset space ~
16007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16009 \begin_inset space ~
16013 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16023 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16029 \begin_inset Newline newline
16032 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16036 \begin_layout Standard
16038 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16039 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16040 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16041 \begin_inset space ~
16045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16047 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16054 \begin_layout Itemize
16056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16063 This is text with emphasize on
16068 \begin_layout Itemize
16072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16079 This is text with Noun on.
16081 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16088 , this is a logical attribute.
16089 Normally it's equivalent to
16092 \begin_inset space ~
16102 \begin_layout Standard
16103 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16104 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16106 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16111 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16112 chosen a new character style
16113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16114 applied a text property
16117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16120 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16122 \begin_inset space ~
16125 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16127 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16133 arg "dialog-show character"
16141 arg "dialog-show character"
16144 ) dialog, the settings are
16145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16149 You can activate the
16150 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16152 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16153 last applied properties
16155 by using the toolbar button
16158 arg "textstyle-apply"
16162 The button lets you apply
16163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16164 your custom character style
16165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16168 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16170 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16171 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16172 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16173 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16178 \begin_layout Standard
16179 To completely reset the
16180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16183 text properties of a selection
16185 to the default, use
16186 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16188 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16198 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16203 from the menu of the toolbar button
16206 arg "textstyle-apply"
16213 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16214 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16215 you just set the shape to
16216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16234 \begin_inset space ~
16248 \begin_layout Standard
16250 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16251 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16259 \begin_inset space ~
16271 \begin_layout Itemize
16273 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16286 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16304 \begin_inset Newline newline
16308 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16322 \begin_inset Note Note
16325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16326 For more on phantoms see section
16327 \begin_inset space ~
16331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16333 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16343 \begin_inset Newline newline
16349 \begin_layout Itemize
16351 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16356 fonts use characters with serifs.
16357 These are the small
16358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16366 The following example shows the difference:
16367 \begin_inset Newline newline
16371 \begin_inset Newline newline
16376 text without serifs
16379 \begin_inset Newline newline
16382 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16383 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16390 \begin_layout Itemize
16392 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16397 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16398 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16399 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16404 \begin_layout Standard
16406 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16414 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16415 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16418 \begin_inset space ~
16423 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16424 the property to be removed.
16425 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16426 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16427 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16445 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16446 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16454 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16458 \begin_inset space ~
16463 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16474 If you, for example, set
16475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16493 \begin_inset space ~
16498 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16507 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16512 \begin_layout Standard
16514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16517 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16518 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16521 \begin_layout Section
16522 Printing and Previewing
16525 \begin_layout Subsection
16529 \begin_layout Standard
16530 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16531 using \SpecialChar LyX
16532 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16533 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16534 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16535 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16537 Additional Features
16542 \begin_layout Standard
16544 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16547 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16548 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16549 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16552 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16553 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16554 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16555 to turn your writing into printable output.
16556 This happens in two stages:
16559 \begin_layout Enumerate
16560 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16561 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16563 a file with the extension,
16564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16578 \begin_layout Enumerate
16579 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16580 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16581 to use the commands in the
16585 file to produce printable output.
16588 \begin_layout Subsection
16589 Output file formats
16590 \begin_inset Index idx
16593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16602 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16610 Simple text (ASCII)
16611 \begin_inset Index idx
16614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16615 File formats ! ASCII
16623 \begin_layout Standard
16624 This file type has the extension
16625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16637 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16641 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16648 \begin_layout Standard
16649 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16651 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16652 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16654 \begin_inset space ~
16660 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16661 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16662 bibliography (section
16663 \begin_inset space ~
16667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16669 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16674 If your document includes such material, use
16676 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16677 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16679 \begin_inset space ~
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16687 \begin_inset space ~
16695 \begin_inset space ~
16699 \begin_inset space ~
16705 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16706 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16712 \begin_inset Index idx
16715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16716 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16725 \begin_layout Standard
16726 This file type has the extension
16727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16738 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16741 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16742 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 -Errors or to process it manually
16744 with console commands.
16745 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16746 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16747 's temporary directory whenever you
16748 view or export your document.
16751 \begin_layout Standard
16752 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16753 -file using the menu
16755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16756 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16760 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16761 export variants are explained in section
16762 \begin_inset space ~
16766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16768 reference "subsec:Export"
16775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16777 \begin_inset Index idx
16780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 \begin_layout Standard
16790 This file type has the extension
16791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16811 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16812 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16813 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16817 \begin_layout Standard
16818 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16819 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16820 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16821 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16822 when you view the DVI.
16823 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16826 \begin_layout Standard
16827 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16829 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16830 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16835 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16836 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16844 The latter option uses the program
16846 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16852 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16855 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16856 font access (see section
16857 \begin_inset space ~
16861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16863 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16868 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16869 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16876 \begin_inset Index idx
16879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16880 File formats ! PostScript
16888 \begin_layout Standard
16889 This file type has the extension
16890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16902 PostScript was developed by the company
16906 as a printer language.
16907 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16909 PostScript can be seen as a
16910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16913 programming language
16914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16917 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16922 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16929 \begin_inset Index idx
16932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16934 packages ! pstricks
16944 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16947 \begin_layout Standard
16948 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16952 Encapsulated PostScript
16953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16956 (EPS, file extension
16957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16969 As \SpecialChar LyX
16970 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16971 convert them in the background to EPS.
16972 If, for example, you have 50
16973 \begin_inset space ~
16976 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16978 \begin_inset space ~
16981 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16982 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16984 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16985 EPS to avoid this problem.
16988 \begin_layout Standard
16989 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16991 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16992 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17000 \begin_inset Index idx
17003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17010 \begin_inset Index idx
17013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17022 \begin_layout Standard
17023 This file type has the extension
17024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17040 Portable Document Format
17041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17048 was derived from PostScript.
17049 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17058 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17059 looks exactly the same.
17062 \begin_layout Standard
17063 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17067 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17071 (JPG, file extension
17072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17099 Portable Network Graphics
17100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17103 (PNG, file extension
17104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17116 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17117 converts them in the
17118 background to one of these formats.
17119 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17120 will slow down your workflow.
17121 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17125 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17127 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17133 \begin_layout Description
17135 \begin_inset space ~
17138 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17142 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17145 \begin_layout Description
17147 \begin_inset space ~
17154 ) This uses the program
17156 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17159 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17162 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17165 is a new engine, derived from
17169 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17170 access (see section
17171 \begin_inset space ~
17175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17177 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17182 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17183 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17188 \begin_layout Description
17190 \begin_inset space ~
17197 ) This uses the program
17202 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17208 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17209 font access (see section
17210 \begin_inset space ~
17214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17216 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17221 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17222 vertically written Japanese.
17225 \begin_layout Description
17227 \begin_inset space ~
17230 (cropped) This is the same as
17233 \begin_inset space ~
17238 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17239 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17240 to generate good-looking
17241 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17244 \begin_layout Description
17246 \begin_inset space ~
17249 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17253 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17257 \begin_layout Description
17259 \begin_inset space ~
17262 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17266 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17267 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17271 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17272 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17275 \begin_layout Standard
17279 \begin_inset space ~
17288 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17289 works without problems.
17290 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17291 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17303 \begin_inset space ~
17308 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17316 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17318 \begin_inset Index idx
17321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17322 FileFormats ! XHTML
17328 \begin_inset Index idx
17331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17340 \begin_layout Standard
17341 This file type has the extension
17342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17354 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17355 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17356 When \SpecialChar LyX
17357 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17358 suitable for the purpose.
17359 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17365 between different formats, which are described in section
17367 Math Output in XHTML
17372 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_layout Standard
17381 XHTML output remains
17382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17389 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17390 features are supported yet.
17394 and the World Wide Web
17398 Additional Features
17400 manual, for more information.
17403 \begin_layout Standard
17404 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17406 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17407 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17413 \begin_layout Subsection
17415 \begin_inset Index idx
17418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17427 \begin_layout Standard
17428 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17429 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17438 or use the toolbar button
17445 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17446 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17453 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17457 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17459 \begin_inset space ~
17463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17465 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17470 Further output formats can be selected via
17472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17473 View (Other Formats)
17475 or the toolbar button
17484 \begin_layout Standard
17485 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17486 viewer window using the menu
17488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17494 Update (Other Formats)
17499 \begin_layout Standard
17500 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17503 To have a real output, export your document.
17506 \begin_layout Section
17507 A few Words about Typography
17508 \begin_inset Index idx
17511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17520 \begin_layout Subsection
17521 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17522 \begin_inset Index idx
17525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17532 \begin_inset Index idx
17535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17544 \begin_layout Standard
17545 In \SpecialChar LyX
17547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17558 symbol comes in four variants: the
17575 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17581 \begin_layout Standard
17582 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17592 height_special "totalheight"
17597 backgroundcolor "none"
17600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17601 \begin_inset Tabular
17602 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17603 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17604 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17605 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17607 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17608 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17636 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17676 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 system key combination
17703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17704 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17716 and the em dash with
17719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17732 is the Mac label for the right
17743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17756 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 system key combination or
17780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17807 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17846 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17852 \begin_layout Standard
17853 Dashes can also be inserted with
17855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17860 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17868 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17869 and 2014 for the en dash).
17872 \begin_layout Standard
17873 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17874 mode and has a length of its own.
17875 Here are some examples:
17878 \begin_layout Enumerate
17879 line- and page-breaks
17880 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17890 \begin_layout Enumerate
17892 \begin_inset space ~
17896 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17906 \begin_layout Enumerate
17907 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17908 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17918 \begin_layout Enumerate
17919 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17923 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17933 \begin_layout Standard
17935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17937 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17938 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17946 \begin_layout Subsection
17947 Dashes and Line Breaks
17948 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17950 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17957 \begin_layout Standard
17958 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17959 case and locale, e.
17960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17966 \begin_layout Itemize
17967 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17968 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17971 \begin_layout Itemize
17972 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17976 \begin_layout Itemize
17977 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17978 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17981 \begin_layout Standard
17982 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17983 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17994 allows line breaks after hyphens
17995 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
17997 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18000 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18003 \begin_layout Enumerate
18004 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18005 \begin_inset space ~
18008 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18010 The Elements of Typographic Style
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18016 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18019 \begin_layout Enumerate
18020 Unwanted line breaks
18025 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18027 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18030 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18037 Prevent Hyphenation
18042 \begin_inset space ~
18058 in \SpecialChar TeX
18060 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18061 , a protected space does not suffice
18065 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18072 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18073 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18074 in the document language.
18075 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18089 \begin_layout Itemize
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18105 height_special "totalheight"
18110 backgroundcolor "none"
18113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18122 \begin_layout Itemize
18124 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18134 height_special "totalheight"
18139 backgroundcolor "none"
18142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18144 \begin_inset space ~
18152 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18156 – sont très utiles.
18159 \begin_layout Itemize
18164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18173 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18177 \begin_layout Standard
18178 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18179 \begin_inset space ~
18182 – in contrast to an overfull line
18183 \begin_inset space ~
18186 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18190 \begin_layout Standard
18191 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18194 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18195 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18196 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18197 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18202 \begin_layout Enumerate
18203 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18204 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18205 or \SpecialChar TeX
18211 \begin_layout Itemize
18213 \begin_inset space ~
18216 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18220 – sont très utiles.
18224 \begin_layout Enumerate
18225 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18226 \begin_inset Newline newline
18231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18232 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18234 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18236 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18238 \begin_inset space ~
18244 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18246 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18248 \begin_inset space ~
18259 \begin_layout Itemize
18260 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18261 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18262 should be followed by
18263 a line break opportunity.
18266 \begin_layout Standard
18267 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18268 \begin_inset space ~
18272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18274 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18285 \begin_layout Enumerate
18286 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18287 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18288 or en dashes (see section
18289 \begin_inset space ~
18293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18295 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18305 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18306 Changes and backwards compatibility
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18310 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18312 \begin_inset space ~
18315 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18316 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18325 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18326 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18334 \begin_layout Standard
18335 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18337 \begin_inset space ~
18340 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18342 prevents ligation to dashes.
18344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18351 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18356 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18357 after the input (unless the current text font is
18365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18366 The behavior was changed since
18367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18382 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18383 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18384 as non-breakable dashes.
18385 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18394 \begin_layout Standard
18397 \begin_inset space ~
18405 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18407 \begin_inset space ~
18410 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18413 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18414 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18415 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18416 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18418 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18422 If you used both literal and
18423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18430 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18432 \begin_inset space ~
18435 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18436 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18439 \begin_layout Subsection
18441 \begin_inset Index idx
18444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18453 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18460 \begin_layout Standard
18461 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18462 but automatically in the output.
18463 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18469 \begin_inset Index idx
18472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18479 following the rules of the document language.
18481 does not hyphenate text in the
18485 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18488 \begin_layout Standard
18490 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18494 font and with unusual constructs, like
18495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18503 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18504 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18505 This is done with the menu
18507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18508 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18510 \begin_inset space ~
18516 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18518 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18522 \begin_layout Standard
18523 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18524 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 would then see the hyphen
18536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 as a line break possibility.
18544 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18545 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18549 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18552 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18554 Prevent Hyphenation
18559 \begin_inset space ~
18567 \begin_layout Subsection
18569 \begin_inset Index idx
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18582 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18585 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18592 \begin_layout Standard
18593 When \SpecialChar LyX
18594 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18595 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18597 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18603 appropriate amount of space.
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18607 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18609 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18610 gets after another word.
18613 \begin_layout Standard
18614 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18615 not work in all cases.
18617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18628 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18629 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18632 \begin_layout Standard
18633 Here are some examples of
18637 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18640 \begin_layout Itemize
18645 \begin_layout Itemize
18650 \begin_layout Standard
18651 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18654 \begin_layout Itemize
18656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18660 this is too much space!
18663 \begin_layout Itemize
18668 \begin_layout Standard
18669 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18672 \begin_layout Standard
18673 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18676 \begin_layout Enumerate
18680 \begin_inset space ~
18685 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18686 \begin_inset space ~
18690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18692 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18697 \begin_inset Index idx
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18701 Spaces ! inter-word
18709 \begin_layout Enumerate
18713 \begin_inset space ~
18718 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18719 \begin_inset space ~
18723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18725 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18730 \begin_inset Index idx
18733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18742 \begin_layout Enumerate
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18750 \begin_inset space ~
18754 \begin_inset space ~
18761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18763 \begin_inset space ~
18768 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18769 This function is also bound to
18772 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18778 \begin_layout Standard
18779 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18782 \begin_layout Itemize
18784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18788 \begin_inset space \space{}
18791 this is too much space!
18794 \begin_layout Itemize
18795 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18799 \begin_layout Standard
18800 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18801 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18803 will take care of this.
18806 \begin_layout Standard
18807 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18811 \begin_inset space ~
18817 feature described in the section
18819 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18824 Additional Features
18829 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18831 \begin_inset Index idx
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18835 Typography ! Quotation marks
18841 \begin_inset Index idx
18844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18845 Quotation marks | see
18849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18877 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18878 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18879 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18889 The keyboard character,
18893 , generates this automatically.
18896 \begin_layout Standard
18897 You can specify what character the
18901 key produces by using the submenu
18907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18911 \begin_inset Index idx
18914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 Document ! Settings
18920 dialog and switching the
18924 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18925 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18927 \begin_inset space ~
18933 \begin_layout Labeling
18934 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18946 \begin_inset space ~
18950 \begin_inset space ~
18954 \begin_inset Quotes els
18958 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18972 \begin_inset Quotes els
18976 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18979 quotation marks (as common, e.
18980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18986 \begin_layout Labeling
18987 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18990 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18994 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18998 \begin_inset space ~
19002 \begin_inset space ~
19006 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19010 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19016 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19020 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19024 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19028 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19031 quotation marks (as common, e.
19032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19038 \begin_layout Labeling
19039 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19042 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19046 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19050 \begin_inset space ~
19054 \begin_inset space ~
19058 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19062 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19068 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19072 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19076 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19080 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19083 quotation marks (as common, e.
19084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19090 \begin_layout Labeling
19091 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19094 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19098 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19102 \begin_inset space ~
19106 \begin_inset space ~
19110 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19114 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19120 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19124 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19128 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19132 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19135 quotation marks (as common, e.
19136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19142 \begin_layout Labeling
19143 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19146 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19150 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19154 \begin_inset space ~
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19162 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19166 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19172 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19176 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19180 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19184 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19187 quotation marks (as common, e.
19188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19191 g., in Switzerland)
19194 \begin_layout Labeling
19195 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19198 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19202 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset Quotes als
19218 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19224 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19228 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19232 \begin_inset Quotes als
19236 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19239 quotation marks (as common, e.
19240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19246 \begin_layout Labeling
19247 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19250 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19254 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19258 \begin_inset space ~
19262 \begin_inset space ~
19266 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19270 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19276 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19280 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19284 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19288 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19291 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19294 \begin_layout Labeling
19295 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19298 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19302 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19306 \begin_inset space ~
19310 \begin_inset space ~
19314 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19318 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19324 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19328 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19332 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19336 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19339 quotation marks (as common, e.
19340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19343 g., in Great Britain)
19346 \begin_layout Labeling
19347 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19350 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19354 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19358 \begin_inset space ~
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19366 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19370 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19376 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19380 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19384 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19388 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19391 quotation marks (as common, e.
19392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19398 \begin_layout Labeling
19399 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19402 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19406 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19410 \begin_inset space ~
19414 \begin_inset space ~
19418 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19422 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19428 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19432 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19436 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19440 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19443 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19448 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19449 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19450 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19451 the inner marks differ).
19459 \begin_layout Labeling
19460 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19463 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19467 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19471 \begin_inset space ~
19475 \begin_inset space ~
19479 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19483 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19489 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19493 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19497 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19501 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19504 quotation marks (as common, e.
19505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19511 \begin_layout Labeling
19512 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19515 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19519 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19523 \begin_inset space ~
19527 \begin_inset space ~
19531 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19535 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19541 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19545 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19549 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19553 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19556 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19559 \begin_layout Labeling
19560 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19561 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19569 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19575 \begin_inset space ~
19579 \begin_inset space ~
19585 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19593 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19597 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19601 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19605 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19609 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19612 quotation marks (as common, e.
19613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19622 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19630 \begin_layout Labeling
19631 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19632 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19640 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19646 \begin_inset space ~
19650 \begin_inset space ~
19656 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19664 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19668 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19672 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19676 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19680 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19683 quotation marks (as common, e.
19684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19687 g., in North Korea and China)
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19693 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19701 \begin_layout Standard
19702 Inner quotation marks
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19708 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19709 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19717 does not necessarily mean
19718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19726 This is why we call them
19727 \begin_inset Quotes els
19731 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19747 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19749 \begin_inset Quotes els
19753 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19756 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19759 arg "quote-insert inner"
19764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19770 \begin_layout Standard
19771 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19772 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19773 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19774 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19775 If you check the setting
19777 Use dynamic quotation marks
19781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19782 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19785 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19786 they appear in a special color).
19787 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19788 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19793 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19796 \begin_layout Standard
19797 Individual quotation marks (i.
19798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19801 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19802 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19806 \begin_layout Subsection
19808 \begin_inset Index idx
19811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 Typography ! Ligatures
19818 \begin_inset Index idx
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19852 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19859 \begin_layout Standard
19860 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19861 print them as single characters.
19862 These groups are known as
19867 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19868 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19870 Here are the standard ligatures:
19873 \begin_layout Itemize
19877 \begin_layout Itemize
19881 \begin_layout Itemize
19885 \begin_layout Itemize
19889 \begin_layout Itemize
19893 \begin_layout Standard
19894 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19897 \begin_layout Standard
19898 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19899 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19907 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19923 To break a ligature, use
19925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19928 \begin_inset space ~
19935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19946 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19963 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19971 \begin_layout Subsection
19973 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19975 \begin_inset Index idx
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 \begin_layout Standard
19991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19992 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19996 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19999 \begin_layout Description
20001 The name of the game.
20004 \begin_layout Description
20006 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20010 \begin_layout Description
20012 The \SpecialChar TeX
20013 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20017 \begin_layout Description
20018 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20019 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20023 \begin_layout Standard
20024 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20030 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20038 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20039 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20040 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20041 converges to the number
20042 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20045 : The actual version is
20046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20054 , the previous one was
20055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20066 \begin_layout Subsection
20068 \begin_inset Index idx
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 \begin_layout Standard
20081 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20082 space between two words.
20083 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20093 for units use the menu
20095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20096 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20098 \begin_inset space ~
20106 arg "space-insert thin"
20112 \begin_layout Standard
20113 Here is an example to show the differences:
20116 \begin_layout Standard
20117 \begin_inset Tabular
20118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20120 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20121 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 \begin_inset space ~
20132 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 space between number and unit
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20160 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 half space between number and unit
20185 \begin_layout Subsection
20187 \begin_inset Index idx
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20191 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20199 \begin_layout Standard
20200 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20202 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20203 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20204 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20205 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20206 These bits of text became known as
20217 \begin_layout Standard
20218 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20219 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20220 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20221 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20222 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20223 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20224 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20225 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20226 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20227 \begin_inset Newline newline
20235 \begin_inset Newline newline
20243 \begin_inset Newline newline
20246 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20247 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20248 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20250 \begin_inset space ~
20254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20256 key "latexcompanion"
20262 \begin_inset space ~
20266 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20273 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20274 's page break mechanism.
20277 \begin_layout Chapter
20278 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20281 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20288 \begin_layout Standard
20289 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20292 \begin_inset space ~
20298 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20301 \begin_layout Section
20303 \begin_inset Index idx
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20322 \begin_layout Standard
20324 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20327 \begin_layout Description
20330 \begin_inset space ~
20333 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20334 \begin_inset Newline newline
20338 \begin_inset Note Note
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20350 \begin_layout Description
20351 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20352 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20353 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20356 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20357 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20359 \begin_inset space ~
20365 \begin_inset Newline newline
20369 \begin_inset Note Comment
20372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20373 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20382 \begin_layout Description
20384 \begin_inset space ~
20387 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20388 set in the document settings under
20390 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20392 \begin_inset space ~
20398 \begin_inset Newline newline
20402 \begin_inset Newline newline
20406 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20415 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20416 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20421 of a comment that appears in the output.
20427 \begin_inset Newline newline
20431 \begin_inset Newline newline
20434 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20437 \begin_layout Standard
20438 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20450 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20453 \begin_layout Section
20455 \begin_inset Index idx
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20467 name "sec:Footnotes"
20474 \begin_layout Standard
20476 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20482 or the toolbar button
20485 arg "footnote-insert"
20497 \begin_inset Graphics
20498 filename clipart/footnote.png
20507 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20508 's representation of your footnote.
20518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20537 label, the box will
20541 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20542 Clicking on the box label again will close
20555 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20556 and click on the footnote
20571 \begin_layout Standard
20572 Here is an example footnote:
20580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20589 \begin_layout Standard
20590 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20591 position where the footnote box is placed.
20592 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20593 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20594 according to the document class.
20596 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20597 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20603 ey are described in the
20606 \begin_inset space ~
20614 \begin_layout Section
20616 \begin_inset Index idx
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20628 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20635 \begin_layout Standard
20636 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20638 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20642 \begin_inset space ~
20647 or the toolbar button
20650 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20676 appearing within your text.
20677 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20678 's representation of your margin
20687 \begin_layout Standard
20688 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20692 \begin_inset Marginal
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 This is a marginal note.
20705 \begin_layout Standard
20706 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20707 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20708 pages, right on odd pages.
20711 \begin_layout Standard
20712 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20715 \begin_inset space ~
20723 \begin_inset space ~
20731 \begin_layout Section
20732 Graphics and Images
20733 \begin_inset Index idx
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 \begin_inset Index idx
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20755 name "sec:Graphics"
20762 \begin_layout Standard
20763 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20764 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20767 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20776 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20779 \begin_layout Standard
20780 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20785 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20786 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20788 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20789 \begin_inset space ~
20793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20795 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20802 \begin_layout Standard
20807 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20808 of the image in the output.
20809 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20813 \begin_inset space ~
20817 \begin_inset space ~
20826 \begin_inset space ~
20830 \begin_inset space ~
20834 \begin_inset space ~
20839 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20840 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20848 \begin_layout Standard
20852 \begin_inset space ~
20856 \begin_inset space ~
20861 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20862 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20864 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20869 \begin_inset space ~
20874 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20875 with the image size is printed.
20878 \begin_layout Standard
20879 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20880 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20882 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20885 \begin_layout Standard
20887 \begin_inset Graphics
20888 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20896 \begin_layout Standard
20897 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20898 the image into a float, see section
20899 \begin_inset space ~
20903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20905 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20912 \begin_layout Subsection
20914 \begin_inset Index idx
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20926 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20933 \begin_layout Standard
20934 You can insert images in any known file format.
20935 But as we explained in section
20936 \begin_inset space ~
20940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20942 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20946 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20948 therefore uses the program
20952 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20953 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20954 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20955 \begin_inset space ~
20959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20961 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20968 \begin_layout Standard
20969 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20972 \begin_layout Description
20974 \begin_inset space ~
20977 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20978 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20979 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20983 Graphics Interchange Format
20984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20987 (GIF, file extension
20988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21000 \begin_inset Index idx
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21035 Portable Network Graphics
21036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21039 (PNG, file extension
21040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21052 \begin_inset Index idx
21055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21087 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21091 (JPG, file extension
21092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21116 \begin_inset Index idx
21119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21150 \begin_layout Description
21152 \begin_inset space ~
21155 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21157 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21158 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21159 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21160 \begin_inset Newline newline
21163 Scalable image formats can be
21164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21167 Scalable Vector Graphics
21168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21171 (SVG, file extension
21172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21184 \begin_inset Index idx
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21219 Encapsulated PostScript
21220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21223 (EPS, file extension
21224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21236 \begin_inset Index idx
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21271 Portable Document Format
21272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21275 (PDF, file extension
21276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21288 \begin_inset Index idx
21291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21306 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21307 result will not be scalable.
21308 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21322 \begin_layout Standard
21323 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21330 \begin_layout Subsection
21331 Grouping of Image Settings
21332 \begin_inset Index idx
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21336 Images ! Settings grouping
21344 \begin_layout Standard
21345 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21347 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21348 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21350 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21351 need to manually change each of them.
21355 \begin_layout Standard
21356 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21359 \begin_inset space ~
21363 \begin_inset space ~
21375 \begin_inset space ~
21379 \begin_inset space ~
21385 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21386 and checking the name of the desired group.
21389 \begin_layout Section
21391 \begin_inset Index idx
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21410 \begin_layout Standard
21411 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21414 arg "tabular-insert"
21419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21423 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21424 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21425 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21428 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21429 from the rest of the table.
21430 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21431 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21433 Here is an example table:
21436 \begin_layout Standard
21438 \begin_inset Tabular
21439 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21440 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21441 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21442 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21443 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21444 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
21646 \begin_layout Standard
21648 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
21649 This corresponds to the
21650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21657 table style listed in the style selection.
21660 \begin_layout Standard
21662 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
21663 Other available styles include:
21666 \begin_layout Itemize
21668 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
21670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21677 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
21681 \begin_layout Itemize
21683 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
21684 a border-less table with no lines at all,
21687 \begin_layout Itemize
21689 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
21691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21698 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
21699 bold top/bottom lines (see
21710 \begin_layout Standard
21712 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
21713 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
21714 button can be changed in
21716 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21717 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21721 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
21725 \begin_layout Subsection
21729 \begin_layout Standard
21730 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21733 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21737 This brings up the table dialog.
21738 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21739 cursor is placed currently.
21740 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21741 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21742 done on all of your selection.
21745 \begin_layout Standard
21746 In addition to the table dialog, the
21749 \begin_inset space ~
21754 helps you in setting table properties.
21755 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21758 \begin_layout Standard
21762 \begin_inset space ~
21767 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21768 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21769 current cell respectively.
21770 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21772 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21773 of text, see section
21774 \begin_inset space ~
21778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21780 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21787 \begin_layout Standard
21788 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21789 using the check box
21798 This will merge the cells to
21802 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21803 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21804 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21805 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21806 in the last row without the upper border:
21809 \begin_layout Standard
21811 \begin_inset Tabular
21812 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21813 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21814 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21815 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21913 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21948 \begin_layout Standard
21949 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21950 -arguments for the table.
21951 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21952 explained in the chapter
21959 \begin_inset space ~
21965 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21966 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21967 but are visible in the output.
21970 \begin_layout Standard
21971 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 Most DVI-viewers are
21983 able to display rotations.
21991 \begin_layout Standard
21996 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22001 adds lines for all cell borders.
22004 \begin_layout Subsection
22006 \begin_inset Index idx
22009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 Tables ! Multi-page
22016 \begin_inset Index idx
22019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 \begin_layout Standard
22029 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22032 \begin_inset space ~
22036 \begin_inset space ~
22044 \begin_inset space ~
22049 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22050 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22053 \begin_layout Description
22058 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22059 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22060 Except for the first page, if
22063 \begin_inset space ~
22071 \begin_layout Description
22075 \begin_inset space ~
22080 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22081 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22084 \begin_layout Description
22089 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22090 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22091 except for the last page, if
22094 \begin_inset space ~
22102 \begin_layout Description
22106 \begin_inset space ~
22111 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22112 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22115 \begin_layout Description
22116 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22117 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22123 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22126 \begin_inset space ~
22134 \begin_layout Standard
22135 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22136 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22137 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22143 In this context, first means first in this order:
22146 \begin_inset space ~
22158 \begin_inset space ~
22163 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22166 \begin_layout Standard
22168 \begin_inset Tabular
22169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22170 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22171 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22172 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22173 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22174 <row endfirsthead="true">
22175 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22186 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <row endfirsthead="true">
22206 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22217 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <row endhead="true">
22239 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22250 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22259 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <row endhead="true">
22270 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <row endfoot="true">
22303 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23295 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23448 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23510 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23572 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23727 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23758 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23851 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24037 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24130 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <row endlastfoot="true">
24285 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 \begin_layout Subsection
24324 \begin_inset Index idx
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24336 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24343 \begin_layout Standard
24344 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24345 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24346 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24347 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24351 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24354 \begin_layout Standard
24355 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24356 for the column in the table dialog.
24357 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24358 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24362 \begin_layout Standard
24364 \begin_inset Tabular
24365 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24366 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24367 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24368 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24369 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24514 This is longer now.
24519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24571 This is longer now.
24576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 \begin_layout Standard
24603 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24604 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24609 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24610 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24616 Selection with the mouse or with
24620 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24621 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24622 the selection from outside the table.
24625 \begin_layout Section
24627 \begin_inset Index idx
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24646 \begin_layout Subsection
24650 \begin_layout Standard
24651 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24652 have a fixed location.
24654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24661 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24669 \begin_inset space ~
24674 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24675 too many notes on the current page.
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24680 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24681 and pages without text.
24682 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24683 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24684 Floats are therefore numbered.
24685 Referencing is described in section
24686 \begin_inset space ~
24690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24692 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24699 \begin_layout Standard
24700 To insert a float, use the menu
24702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24706 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24707 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24709 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24710 \begin_inset Index idx
24713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24720 paragraph within the float.
24721 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24722 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24723 left-clicking on the box label.
24724 A closed float box looks like this:
24725 \begin_inset Graphics
24726 filename clipart/float.png
24731 – a gray button with a red label.
24734 \begin_layout Standard
24735 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24737 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24740 \begin_layout Subsection
24742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24744 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24749 \begin_inset Index idx
24752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24753 Floats ! Figure floats
24761 \begin_layout Standard
24763 \begin_inset space ~
24767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24769 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24773 was created using the menu
24775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24776 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24782 arg "float-insert figure"
24786 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24795 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24799 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24800 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24802 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24804 \begin_inset space ~
24812 arg "layout-paragraph"
24818 \begin_layout Standard
24819 \begin_inset Float figure
24826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 \begin_inset Graphics
24829 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24839 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24844 name "fig:A-star-in"
24861 \begin_layout Standard
24862 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24863 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24874 ) and refer to it using the menu
24876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24882 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24886 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24887 vague references like
24888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24895 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24896 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24906 For more about cross-references, see section
24907 \begin_inset space ~
24911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24913 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24920 \begin_layout Standard
24921 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24922 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24923 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24924 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24925 as described in section
24926 \begin_inset space ~
24930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24932 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24938 \begin_inset space ~
24942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24944 reference "fig:Two-images"
24948 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24949 You can also set the images one below the other.
24951 \begin_inset space ~
24955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24957 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24964 reference "fig:Star"
24968 are the subfigures.
24971 \begin_layout Standard
24972 \begin_inset Float figure
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24984 \begin_inset Float figure
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24997 name "fig:Undefinable"
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25010 \begin_inset Graphics
25011 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25023 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25027 \begin_inset Float figure
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 \begin_inset Graphics
25054 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25066 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25078 name "fig:Two-images"
25095 \begin_layout Subsection
25097 \begin_inset Index idx
25100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 Floats ! Table floats
25109 \begin_layout Standard
25110 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25113 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25116 or the toolbar button
25119 arg "float-insert table"
25123 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25124 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25125 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25127 \begin_inset space ~
25131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25133 reference "tab:Table-float"
25140 \begin_layout Standard
25141 \begin_inset Float table
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25154 name "tab:Table-float"
25166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 \begin_inset Tabular
25169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25173 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25324 \end{array}\right]$
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25366 \begin_layout Subsection
25368 \begin_inset Index idx
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 \begin_layout Standard
25382 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25383 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25384 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25386 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25394 \begin_inset space ~
25402 \begin_layout Section
25404 \begin_inset Index idx
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25416 \begin_layout Standard
25418 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25420 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25421 \begin_inset space \space{}
25428 \begin_layout Standard
25429 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25430 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25436 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25437 and its alignment within the page.
25440 \begin_layout Standard
25442 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25452 height_special "totalheight"
25457 backgroundcolor "none"
25460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25463 This is a minipage.
25464 The text is set in an italic style.
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25470 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25471 another formatting.
25479 \begin_layout Standard
25480 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25483 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25487 as described in section
25488 \begin_inset space ~
25492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25494 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25499 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25505 \begin_layout Standard
25506 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25516 height_special "totalheight"
25521 backgroundcolor "none"
25524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25525 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25526 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25536 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25546 height_special "totalheight"
25551 backgroundcolor "none"
25554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25555 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25556 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25564 \begin_layout Standard
25565 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25571 \begin_layout Standard
25572 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25574 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25581 \begin_inset space ~
25589 \begin_layout Chapter
25590 Mathematical Formulas
25591 \begin_inset Index idx
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 \begin_inset Index idx
25604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25635 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25642 \begin_layout Standard
25643 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25648 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25651 \begin_layout Section
25653 \begin_inset Index idx
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25665 \begin_layout Standard
25666 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25679 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25681 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25682 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25683 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25691 \begin_layout Standard
25692 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25696 \begin_inset space ~
25701 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25704 \begin_layout Standard
25705 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25706 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25709 \begin_layout Standard
25710 This is a line with an inline formula
25711 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25717 \begin_layout Standard
25718 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25719 paragraph, like this one:
25720 \begin_inset Formula
25727 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25730 \begin_layout Standard
25732 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25734 For example, typing
25735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25748 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25749 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25753 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25756 \begin_inset space ~
25764 \begin_layout Subsection
25765 Navigating in Formulas
25766 \begin_inset Index idx
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 \begin_layout Standard
25779 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25780 achieved with the arrow keys.
25782 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25783 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25788 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25789 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25793 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25797 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25800 \end{array}\right]$
25808 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25813 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25814 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25817 \begin_layout Standard
25822 , printed in this document as
25823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25827 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25834 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25835 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25836 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25841 For example, if you want
25842 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25850 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25860 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25864 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25869 , since in the latter case only the
25872 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25877 will be under the square root sign:
25878 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25884 \begin_layout Standard
25885 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25887 \begin_inset Formula
25889 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25898 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25899 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25902 \begin_layout Subsection
25906 \begin_layout Standard
25907 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25908 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25912 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25913 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25914 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25915 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25916 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25920 \begin_layout Subsection
25921 Exponents and Subscripts
25922 \begin_inset Index idx
25925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 \begin_inset Index idx
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25944 \begin_layout Standard
25945 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25948 arg "math-superscript"
25954 arg "math-subscript"
25957 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25959 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25962 , type in a formula
25965 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25975 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25981 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25985 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25991 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25997 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26006 , you have to use an extra
26010 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26011 For example, if you want
26012 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26018 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26024 Subscripts are similar: To get
26025 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26031 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26039 \begin_layout Subsection
26041 \begin_inset Index idx
26044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 Create a fraction either with the command
26060 or by using the icon
26063 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26069 \begin_inset space ~
26075 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26076 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26077 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26082 To move back up, press
26087 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26088 \begin_inset Formula
26090 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26093 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26101 \begin_layout Subsection
26103 \begin_inset Index idx
26106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 \begin_layout Standard
26116 Roots can be created using the
26119 \begin_inset space ~
26127 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26133 arg "math-insert \\root"
26155 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26161 always produces a square root.
26164 \begin_layout Subsection
26165 Operators with Limits
26166 \begin_inset Index idx
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26176 \begin_inset Index idx
26179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26188 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26195 \begin_layout Standard
26197 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26201 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26204 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26205 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26206 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26207 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26208 The sum operator will automatically place its
26209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26216 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26218 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26222 \begin_inset Formula
26224 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26229 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26233 \begin_layout Standard
26234 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26236 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26237 behind the operator and using the menu
26239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26240 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26242 \begin_inset space ~
26246 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Standard
26261 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26270 \begin_inset Index idx
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26280 \begin_inset Formula
26282 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26287 which will place the
26288 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26300 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26301 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26307 \begin_layout Standard
26308 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26315 Have a look at section
26316 \begin_inset space ~
26320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26322 reference "subsec:Functions"
26326 for an explanation of function macros.
26329 \begin_layout Subsection
26331 \begin_inset Index idx
26334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26343 \begin_layout Standard
26344 Most math symbols can be found in the
26347 \begin_inset space ~
26352 under one of several categories; including
26369 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26373 \begin_layout Standard
26374 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26375 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26376 don't have to use the
26379 \begin_inset space ~
26384 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26386 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26389 \begin_layout Subsection
26391 \begin_inset Index idx
26394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26403 \begin_layout Standard
26404 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26410 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26416 \begin_inset space ~
26424 arg "math-insert \\space"
26428 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26429 For example, the sequence
26434 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26437 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26439 \begin_inset Graphics
26440 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26445 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26446 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26447 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26448 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26449 , because they are negative
26451 Here are two examples:
26454 \begin_layout Standard
26464 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26470 \begin_layout Standard
26480 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26486 \begin_layout Subsection
26488 \begin_inset Index idx
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26500 name "subsec:Functions"
26507 \begin_layout Standard
26511 \begin_inset space ~
26516 contains under the button
26519 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26522 a number of function macros, such as
26523 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26527 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26535 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26542 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26543 avoid confusions, because
26544 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26548 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26554 \begin_layout Standard
26555 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26557 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26561 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26567 \begin_layout Standard
26568 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26569 are placed, as described in section
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26576 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26583 \begin_layout Subsection
26585 \begin_inset Index idx
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 \begin_layout Standard
26598 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26600 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26601 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26602 commands, for example, to enter
26603 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26606 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26607 Our example is entered by typing
26612 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26619 \begin_inset space ~
26623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26625 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26629 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26632 \begin_layout Standard
26633 \begin_inset Float table
26640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26641 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26646 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26650 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 \begin_inset Tabular
26661 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26662 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26663 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26664 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26749 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26857 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27019 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27073 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27127 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27181 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27226 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27247 \begin_layout Standard
27248 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27251 \begin_inset space ~
27259 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27262 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27266 \begin_layout Section
27267 Brackets and Delimiters
27268 \begin_inset Index idx
27271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27278 \begin_inset Index idx
27281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27290 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27298 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27300 For some purposes, using just the keys
27305 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27306 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27307 toolbar delimiter icon
27310 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27314 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27315 \begin_inset Formula
27317 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27325 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27326 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27330 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27333 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27339 \begin_inset Formula
27341 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27349 \begin_layout Standard
27350 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27351 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27355 \begin_layout Standard
27356 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27357 left side and right side.
27358 If you use the option
27361 \begin_inset space ~
27366 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27367 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27369 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27374 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27375 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27378 \begin_layout Standard
27379 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27380 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27381 is to go inside the brackets.
27382 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27387 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27388 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27389 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27393 arg "math-delim ( )"
27399 \begin_layout Section
27400 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27401 \begin_inset Index idx
27404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27411 \begin_inset Index idx
27414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 \begin_inset Index idx
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27425 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27433 \begin_layout Standard
27434 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27438 \begin_inset space ~
27446 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27450 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27451 Here is an example:
27452 \begin_inset Formula
27454 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27463 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27464 \begin_inset space ~
27468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27470 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27475 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27476 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27477 This alignment is set in the box
27482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27531 for every column as default.
27532 For example, the sequence
27533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27544 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27545 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27546 corresponds to the relevant column.
27547 The result will look like this:
27548 \begin_inset Formula
27551 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27552 column & has & has\,right\\
27553 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27563 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27566 arg "newline-insert newline"
27569 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27570 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27572 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27575 or the math toolbar.
27578 \begin_layout Standard
27579 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27580 It can be created with the menu
27582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27583 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27585 \begin_inset space ~
27597 Here is an example:
27598 \begin_inset Formula
27612 \begin_layout Standard
27613 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27616 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27619 arg "newline-insert newline"
27623 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27628 arg "newline-insert newline"
27631 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27639 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27640 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27641 A new row is created by every further entry of
27644 arg "newline-insert newline"
27648 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27649 Here is an example:
27650 \begin_inset Formula
27652 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27653 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27658 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27659 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27660 \begin_inset Formula
27662 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27670 \begin_layout Standard
27671 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27678 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27679 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27682 reference "eq:asquared"
27687 The other types are described in section
27688 \begin_inset space ~
27692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27694 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27701 \begin_layout Section
27702 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27703 \begin_inset Index idx
27706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 Math ! Formula numbering
27713 \begin_inset Index idx
27716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27717 Math ! Referencing formulas
27723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27725 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27732 \begin_layout Standard
27733 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27736 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27738 \begin_inset space ~
27742 \begin_inset space ~
27750 arg "math-number-toggle"
27754 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27755 within parentheses.
27756 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27757 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27758 the document class.
27759 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27760 separated by a dot:
27761 \begin_inset Formula
27771 arg "math-number-toggle"
27774 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27775 You can only number displayed formulas.
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27779 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27781 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27782 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27784 \begin_inset space ~
27788 \begin_inset space ~
27796 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27799 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27800 \begin_inset Formula
27803 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27809 To number all lines use the shortcut
27812 arg "math-number-toggle"
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27819 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27822 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27823 A label is inserted with the menu
27825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27834 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27835 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27836 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27848 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27849 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27850 We inserted in the following example the label
27851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27858 in the second line:
27859 \begin_inset Formula
27861 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27862 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27867 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27868 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27869 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27873 \begin_inset space ~
27881 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27885 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27886 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27887 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27888 as the formula number:
27891 \begin_layout Standard
27892 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27895 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27902 \begin_layout Standard
27903 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27904 's cross-reference box are described in section
27905 \begin_inset space ~
27909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27911 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27916 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27924 \begin_layout Section
27925 User defined math macros
27926 \begin_inset Index idx
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 \begin_layout Standard
27940 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27941 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27942 Math macros are explained in section
27945 \begin_inset space ~
27957 \begin_layout Section
27961 \begin_layout Subsection
27963 \begin_inset Index idx
27966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 \begin_layout Standard
27976 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27977 To set a font in a formula, use the
27980 \begin_inset space ~
27988 arg "math-insert \\font"
27991 , or enter its command, listed in table
27992 \begin_inset space ~
27996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27998 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28006 \begin_inset Float table
28013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28014 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28019 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28023 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28033 \begin_inset Tabular
28034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28096 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28123 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28156 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28183 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28244 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28271 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28314 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28330 \begin_layout Standard
28331 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28332 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28337 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28338 space when you need a space in the box.
28339 Here is an example where
28340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28351 denotes the set of numbers:
28352 \begin_inset Formula
28354 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28362 \begin_layout Standard
28363 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28364 You can, for example, put a character in
28373 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28377 \begin_inset Newline newline
28380 So it is better not to use this feature.
28383 \begin_layout Standard
28384 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28385 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28389 \begin_inset Newline newline
28392 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28398 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28399 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28405 \begin_layout Standard
28412 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28415 \begin_layout Standard
28416 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28418 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28419 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28421 \begin_inset space ~
28429 \begin_layout Subsection
28431 \begin_inset Index idx
28434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28444 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28446 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28450 \begin_inset space ~
28454 \begin_inset space ~
28462 \begin_inset space ~
28470 arg "math-insert \\font"
28474 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28475 in black instead of blue.
28476 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28477 Here is an example:
28478 \begin_inset Formula
28481 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28482 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28491 \begin_layout Subsection
28493 \begin_inset Index idx
28496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28505 \begin_layout Standard
28506 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28507 automatically chosen in most situations.
28525 For most characters,
28533 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28534 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28539 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28540 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28541 thinks are appropriate.
28542 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28545 arg "math-insert \\style"
28549 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28550 For example, you can set
28551 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28554 , which is normally in
28563 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28567 The four styles are used in the following example:
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28575 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28579 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28583 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28589 \begin_layout Standard
28590 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28591 is set in a particular size with the menu
28593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28595 \begin_inset space ~
28600 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28601 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28602 will be adjusted to correspond.
28603 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28614 \begin_layout Standard
28618 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28624 \begin_layout Section
28625 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28627 \begin_inset Index idx
28630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 \begin_inset Index idx
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28651 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28652 that are in common use.
28655 \begin_layout Subsection
28656 Enabling AMS-Support
28659 \begin_layout Standard
28660 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28661 the document by selecting the checkbox
28664 \begin_inset space ~
28668 \begin_inset space ~
28672 \begin_inset space ~
28679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28683 \begin_inset Index idx
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28687 Document ! Settings
28695 \begin_inset space ~
28701 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28702 -errors in formulas,
28703 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28706 \begin_layout Subsection
28708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28710 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28715 \begin_inset Index idx
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28719 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28728 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28729 provides a selection of different formula types.
28731 allows you to choose between
28752 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28753 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28760 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28763 \begin_layout Chapter
28767 \begin_layout Section
28769 \begin_inset Index idx
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28781 name "sec:Cross-References"
28788 \begin_layout Standard
28789 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28790 's strengths is cross-references.
28791 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28793 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28794 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28795 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28798 \begin_layout Enumerate
28802 \begin_layout Enumerate
28803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28805 name "enu:Second-item"
28812 \begin_layout Enumerate
28816 \begin_layout Standard
28817 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28819 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28822 or by pressing the toolbar button
28829 A gray label box like this:
28830 \begin_inset Graphics
28831 filename clipart/label.png
28835 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28837 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28872 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28873 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28889 \begin_layout Standard
28890 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28895 or the toolbar button
28898 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28902 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28903 \begin_inset Graphics
28904 filename clipart/reference.png
28908 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28910 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28923 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28927 \begin_layout Standard
28928 As an alternative to
28930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28933 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28938 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28939 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28941 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28955 \begin_inset space ~
28959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28961 reference "enu:Second-item"
28968 \begin_layout Standard
28969 It is recommended to use a protected space
28973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28974 described in section
28975 \begin_inset space ~
28979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28981 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28990 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28991 line breaks between them.
28994 \begin_layout Standard
28995 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28998 \begin_layout Description
28999 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29002 reference "fig:Two-images"
29009 \begin_layout Description
29010 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29011 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29023 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29030 \begin_layout Description
29031 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29032 \begin_inset space ~
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29037 LatexCommand pageref
29038 reference "fig:Two-images"
29045 \begin_layout Description
29047 \begin_inset space ~
29051 \begin_inset space ~
29054 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29056 LatexCommand vpageref
29057 reference "fig:Two-images"
29062 \begin_inset Newline newline
29065 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29066 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29067 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29068 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29069 it prints “on the next page”.
29070 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29073 \begin_layout Description
29075 \begin_inset space ~
29079 \begin_inset space ~
29083 \begin_inset space ~
29086 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29089 reference "fig:Two-images"
29094 \begin_inset Newline newline
29097 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29103 ; otherwise it behaves like
29107 \begin_inset space ~
29111 \begin_inset space ~
29120 \begin_layout Description
29122 \begin_inset space ~
29125 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29126 \begin_inset Newline newline
29130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29138 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29148 \begin_inset Index idx
29151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29153 packages ! prettyref
29159 \begin_inset Index idx
29162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29164 packages ! refstyle
29175 \begin_inset Newline newline
29178 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29179 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29182 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29195 is the default and preferred because
29199 supports only English documents.
29200 The format is specified by using the command
29212 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29213 preamble of the document.
29214 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29232 \begin_inset Newline newline
29239 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29244 \begin_inset Newline newline
29255 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29256 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29258 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29259 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29264 , you might do so as follows:
29265 \begin_inset Newline newline
29272 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29277 \begin_inset Newline newline
29280 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29281 the package documentation
29282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29284 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29290 \begin_inset Newline newline
29301 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29308 \begin_layout Description
29310 \begin_inset space ~
29313 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29315 LatexCommand nameref
29316 reference "fig:Two-images"
29323 \begin_layout Description
29325 \begin_inset space ~
29328 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29329 label for the reference:
29330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29331 LatexCommand labelonly
29332 reference "fig:Two-images"
29337 \begin_inset Newline newline
29340 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29341 Code, if you want to issue a command
29342 that \SpecialChar LyX
29348 , then you may want to use the
29351 \begin_inset space ~
29356 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29366 This is the form needed for e.
29367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29371 \begin_inset space \space{}
29378 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29379 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29381 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29385 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29389 \begin_layout Standard
29390 You can only use the style
29394 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29398 is always possible.
29401 \begin_layout Standard
29402 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29403 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29405 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29406 \begin_inset space ~
29410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29412 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29419 \begin_layout Standard
29420 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29424 \begin_inset space ~
29428 \begin_inset space ~
29433 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29434 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29437 \begin_inset space ~
29442 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29443 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29446 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29452 \begin_layout Standard
29453 You can change labels at any time.
29454 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29455 do not need to think about this.
29458 \begin_layout Standard
29459 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29461 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29466 References are described in detail in the section
29467 \begin_inset space ~
29477 \begin_inset space ~
29485 \begin_layout Section
29486 Table of Contents and other Listings
29487 \begin_inset Index idx
29490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29497 \begin_inset Index idx
29500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29501 Navigating ! Outline
29507 \begin_inset Index idx
29510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29526 \begin_layout Subsection
29528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29530 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29541 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
29543 \begin_inset space ~
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29553 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29555 If you click on it, the
29559 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29560 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29561 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29563 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29565 \begin_inset space ~
29570 that is described in section
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29577 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29585 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29586 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29588 \begin_inset space ~
29592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29594 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29598 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29600 \begin_inset space ~
29604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29606 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29610 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29612 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29615 \begin_layout Subsection
29616 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29619 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29626 \begin_layout Standard
29627 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29629 You can insert them via the
29631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29632 List/Contents/References
29635 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29638 \begin_layout Section
29639 URLs and Hyperlinks
29640 \begin_inset Index idx
29643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29650 \begin_inset Index idx
29653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29662 \begin_layout Subsection
29664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29673 \begin_layout Standard
29674 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29683 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29685 \begin_inset Flex URL
29688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29690 https://www.lyx.org
29698 \begin_layout Standard
29699 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29705 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29710 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29718 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29727 \begin_layout Subsection
29729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29731 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29738 \begin_layout Standard
29739 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29744 or with the toolbar button
29751 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29760 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29761 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29764 name "LyX's homepage"
29765 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29770 , an Email address like this:
29771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29773 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29774 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29780 , or a link to a file.
29785 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29794 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29807 to the link target.
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29811 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29812 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29813 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29814 the text style dialog.
29815 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29821 name "LyX's homepage"
29822 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29830 \begin_layout Standard
29831 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29835 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29842 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29844 \begin_inset Newline newline
29852 \begin_inset Newline newline
29859 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29862 \begin_layout Section
29864 \begin_inset Index idx
29867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29876 name "sec:Appendices"
29883 \begin_layout Standard
29884 Appendices are created with the menu
29886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29888 \begin_inset space ~
29892 \begin_inset space ~
29898 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29899 as the appendix part of the book.
29900 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29903 \begin_layout Standard
29904 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29905 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29906 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29907 and the subsection number.
29908 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29914 \begin_inset space ~
29918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29920 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
29928 \begin_inset space ~
29932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29934 reference "subsec:Export"
29941 \begin_layout Section
29943 \begin_inset Index idx
29946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29955 name "sec:Bibliography"
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29963 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29965 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29966 \begin_inset space ~
29970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29972 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29979 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29984 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29985 \begin_inset space ~
29989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29991 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29996 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29997 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29998 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30002 using a bibliography database.
30005 \begin_layout Standard
30006 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30007 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30011 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30012 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30013 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30014 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30015 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30018 \begin_layout Subsection
30019 The Bibliography Environment
30020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30022 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30029 \begin_layout Standard
30034 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30036 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30045 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30047 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30048 of ASCII characters only.
30052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30054 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30057 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30063 \begin_inset Newline newline
30067 \begin_inset Flex URL
30070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30072 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30082 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30092 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30093 \begin_inset Newline newline
30100 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30101 the number of the entry.
30106 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30115 \begin_layout Standard
30116 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30121 or the toolbar button
30124 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30128 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30129 containing the available citations.
30130 Select one or more keys from the list and
30140 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30141 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30147 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30148 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30164 Companion Second Edition
30167 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30169 key "latexcompanion"
30177 \begin_layout Standard
30178 The \SpecialChar LyX
30179 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30180 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30198 \begin_inset Index idx
30201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30210 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30211 the label needs to be given the form
30212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30223 Author A and Author B(Year)
30224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30238 \begin_inset space ~
30243 in the document settings
30244 \begin_inset Index idx
30247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30248 Document ! Settings
30255 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30257 \begin_inset space ~
30263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30265 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30273 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30275 Once you have done that, the
30279 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30296 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30297 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30298 These two are madatory.
30299 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30302 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30304 ) and in abrreviated form (
30311 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30312 add the abbreviated form to
30316 and the full list to the optional
30324 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30325 If specified like this,
30327 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30328 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30338 is specified, toggling
30339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30346 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30347 full and abbreviated list
30351 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30352 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30353 the citation references.
30354 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30360 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30363 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30365 \begin_inset space ~
30373 arg "layout-paragraph"
30377 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
30380 \begin_layout Subsection
30381 Bibliography databases
30382 \begin_inset Index idx
30385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 Bibliography ! Databases
30392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30394 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30401 \begin_layout Standard
30402 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30408 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30410 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30411 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30416 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30418 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30419 your working field in a database.
30420 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30421 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30422 list for that document.
30423 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30428 The database is a text file with the file extension
30429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30440 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30441 The format is explained in
30442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30449 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30451 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30453 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30459 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30460 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30461 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30463 \begin_inset Flex URL
30466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30468 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30478 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30479 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30480 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30482 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30484 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30485 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30486 Those are addressed by
30491 \begin_inset Index idx
30494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30496 packages ! biblatex
30502 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30503 (although it has been significantly
30504 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30514 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30515 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30516 might conversely fail to correctly
30517 handle databases that use specific
30526 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30530 \begin_layout Standard
30531 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30536 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30542 \begin_inset Index idx
30545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30546 Document ! Settings
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30563 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30572 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30574 \begin_inset Index idx
30577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30578 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30587 \begin_layout Standard
30588 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30592 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30594 \begin_inset space ~
30600 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30601 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30609 Add bibliography to TOC
30611 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30616 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30617 in the document or just the cited references.
30619 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30624 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30625 differ from the encoding of the document.
30630 \begin_layout Standard
30631 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30632 style file is a text file with the file extension
30633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30644 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30645 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30646 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30647 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30649 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30655 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30656 \begin_inset Newline newline
30660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30662 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30672 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30677 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30681 \begin_layout Standard
30682 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30687 \begin_inset Index idx
30690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30691 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30697 \begin_inset Index idx
30700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30702 packages ! biblatex
30710 \begin_layout Standard
30711 Accessing a database via
30715 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30719 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30721 \begin_inset space ~
30727 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30728 you cannot select a
30733 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30737 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30740 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30741 As for the styles, note the following.
30746 \begin_layout Standard
30751 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30764 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30765 file (text file with the file extension
30766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30777 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30778 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30780 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30784 \begin_layout Standard
30789 styles are not set in the
30792 \begin_inset space ~
30797 dialog, but in the document settings.
30798 \begin_inset Index idx
30801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30802 Document ! Settings
30807 However, in the dialog in the
30811 field, which is only visible if you use
30815 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30816 example how its heading will appear).
30817 These options are described in detail in the
30822 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30832 \begin_layout Standard
30833 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30834 \begin_inset space ~
30838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30840 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30851 Bibliography Processors
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30855 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30856 uses a bibliography processor,
30857 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30858 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30859 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30861 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30862 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30865 \begin_layout Standard
30866 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30868 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30869 You can do this on a general level in
30871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30873 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30876 or for individual documents in
30878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30879 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30883 The following variants are available by default:
30886 \begin_layout Description
30887 biber a specific, modern processor
30888 \begin_inset Index idx
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30898 developed exclusively for
30902 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30908 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30913 makes use of; if you use the
30917 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30924 \begin_layout Description
30925 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30926 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30927 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30931 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30934 \begin_layout Description
30935 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30936 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30940 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30944 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30948 features are supported.
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 By default (with the
30958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30972 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30973 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30974 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30977 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30978 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30991 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30992 -based bibliography styles).
30993 This should suit most needs.
30996 \begin_layout Standard
30997 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30998 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30999 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31004 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31005 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31006 You can adjust it in
31008 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31009 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31010 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31016 \begin_layout Standard
31017 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31018 can add below the selection.
31019 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31020 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31026 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31040 \begin_layout Standard
31042 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31044 These are explained in detail in section
31046 Customizing Bibliographies
31050 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31055 Additional Features
31060 \begin_layout Subsection
31062 \begin_inset Index idx
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31066 Bibliography ! Citation format
31072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31074 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31082 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31087 \begin_inset space \space{}
31090 numerical citation (as
31091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31098 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31106 ) or author-year citations (as
31107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31116 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31120 \begin_layout Standard
31121 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31129 \begin_inset Index idx
31132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31133 Document ! Settings
31138 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31144 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31145 labels, is there to use
31148 \begin_inset space ~
31159 \begin_inset space ~
31164 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31167 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31174 \begin_layout Standard
31175 With a bibliography database (see
31176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31178 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31185 ) one has in contrary to the
31189 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31190 These style formats are available:
31193 \begin_layout Description
31195 \begin_inset space ~
31198 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31199 -based approached without any additional packages
31200 (simple numeric citations).
31203 \begin_layout Description
31204 Biblatex loads the package
31209 \begin_inset Index idx
31212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31214 packages ! biblatex
31219 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31221 Biblatex citation style
31225 Biblatex bibliography style
31228 Options to the package
31232 can be entered in the
31239 \begin_layout Description
31241 \begin_inset space ~
31245 \begin_inset space ~
31248 mode) loads the package
31252 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31253 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31265 behavior very closely.
31270 this option has some additional styles.
31275 styles are also supported by this variant.
31278 \begin_layout Description
31280 \begin_inset space ~
31283 (BibTeX) loads the package
31288 \begin_inset Index idx
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
31301 \begin_layout Description
31303 \begin_inset space ~
31306 (BibTeX) loads the package
31311 \begin_inset Index idx
31314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31321 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
31324 \begin_layout Standard
31333 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
31335 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
31344 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
31346 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
31347 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
31349 Biblatex citation style
31352 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
31358 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
31362 \begin_layout Standard
31363 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
31364 are available in the
31369 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
31370 a name prefix such as
31371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31386 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31391 \begin_inset space \space{}
31395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31406 \begin_layout Standard
31407 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31413 \begin_inset space \space{}
31416 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31422 \begin_inset space \space{}
31426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31438 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31442 \begin_inset space ~
31450 \begin_inset space ~
31456 Here is a simple example where the text
31457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31461 \begin_inset space ~
31465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31468 appears after the reference:
31471 \begin_layout Quote
31473 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31476 key "latexcompanion"
31484 \begin_layout Standard
31485 All styles except for
31489 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31499 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31503 \begin_layout Standard
31504 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31505 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31506 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31511 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31512 multi-citation (so-called
31513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31516 qualified citation lists
31517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31523 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31528 dialog will display three columns in the field
31535 \begin_inset space ~
31543 \begin_inset space ~
31551 \begin_inset space ~
31557 If you double-click on an item's
31560 \begin_inset space ~
31568 \begin_inset space ~
31573 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31576 General text before
31582 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31585 \begin_layout Section
31587 \begin_inset Index idx
31590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31606 \begin_layout Standard
31607 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31611 \begin_inset space ~
31616 or the toolbar button
31623 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31624 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31625 by \SpecialChar LyX
31626 as the index entry.
31629 \begin_layout Standard
31630 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31633 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31635 \begin_inset space ~
31641 A light blue box labeled
31642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31653 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31654 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31658 \begin_layout Standard
31659 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31660 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31661 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31662 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31666 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31674 \begin_layout Subsection
31675 Grouping Index Entries
31676 \begin_inset Index idx
31679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31688 \begin_layout Standard
31689 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31691 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31692 lists under the entry
31693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31701 First we create the entry
31702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31716 reference "subsec:Lists"
31721 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31722 \begin_inset space ~
31726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31728 reference "sec:Itemize"
31732 , we insert the command
31735 \begin_layout Standard
31741 \begin_layout Standard
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31751 \begin_layout Standard
31752 for the enumerated list in section
31753 \begin_inset space ~
31757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31759 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 The exclamation mark
31768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31775 marks the grouping levels.
31776 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31777 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31778 If we don't have an index entry for
31779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31786 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31789 \begin_layout Subsection
31791 \begin_inset Index idx
31794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31795 Index ! Page ranges
31803 \begin_layout Standard
31804 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31806 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31807 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31808 an index entry in section
31809 \begin_inset space ~
31813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31815 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31822 \begin_layout Standard
31825 Paragraph environments|(
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31829 and another entry at the end of section
31830 \begin_inset space ~
31834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31836 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31846 Paragraph environments|)
31849 \begin_layout Standard
31851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31874 respectively start and end the index range.
31875 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31876 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31877 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31878 An example is the index entry
31879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31882 Document ! Settings
31883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31889 \begin_layout Subsection
31891 \begin_inset Index idx
31894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31895 Index ! Cross referencing
31903 \begin_layout Standard
31904 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31905 We referred for example in the index entry
31906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31914 \begin_inset space ~
31918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31920 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31924 ) to the index entry
31925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31932 in the same section using the entry
31935 \begin_layout Standard
31938 GIF|see{Image formats}
31941 \begin_layout Standard
31942 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31944 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31945 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31948 \begin_layout Subsection
31950 \begin_inset Index idx
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31954 Index ! Entry order
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31963 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31964 follow the rules for the index order.
31965 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31971 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31973 \begin_inset space ~
31977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31979 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31988 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31989 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32014 \begin_inset Index idx
32017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32018 Dummy entries ! maïs
32024 \begin_inset Index idx
32027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32028 Dummy entries ! maître
32034 \begin_inset Index idx
32037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32038 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32043 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32044 maïs, maison, maître.
32045 To achieve this, we use the command
32048 \begin_layout Standard
32051 previous entry@current entry
32054 \begin_layout Standard
32055 In our case we want to have
32056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32071 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32080 \begin_layout Standard
32081 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32082 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32084 See the next subsection for an example.
32087 \begin_layout Subsection
32089 \begin_inset Index idx
32092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32093 Index ! Entry layout
32101 \begin_layout Standard
32102 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32103 \begin_inset Index idx
32106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32109 This is an italic dummy entry
32114 You can also format the page number using the character
32115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32122 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32123 -command without a backslash.
32124 We can write for example
32127 \begin_layout Standard
32130 italic page number:|textit
32133 \begin_layout Standard
32134 to get the page number in italic.
32135 \begin_inset Index idx
32138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32139 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32144 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32145 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32163 \begin_inset space ~
32169 Have a look at section
32170 \begin_inset space ~
32174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32176 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32180 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32184 \begin_layout Standard
32185 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32193 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
32197 to generate the index, see section
32198 \begin_inset space ~
32202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32204 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32213 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
32218 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
32219 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32222 key "latexcompanion"
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32236 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
32238 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
32239 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
32240 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
32241 If so, put the following in the preamble
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32260 \begin_layout Standard
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32267 in the index entry.
32268 \begin_inset Index idx
32271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32272 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
32277 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
32278 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
32279 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
32282 \begin_layout Standard
32283 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
32284 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
32285 a bold font for all index entries.
32286 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
32298 documentation for details,
32299 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32301 key "makeindex,xindy"
32309 \begin_layout Subsection
32311 \begin_inset Index idx
32314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32323 name "subsec:Index-Program"
32330 \begin_layout Standard
32331 If the index generation program
32335 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
32336 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
32340 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32341 distribution, is used.
32345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32350 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
32351 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
32352 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
32353 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
32354 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
32364 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
32366 dialog, see section
32367 \begin_inset space ~
32371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32373 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32378 The available options are listed and explained in
32379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32381 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32387 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32391 \begin_layout Standard
32392 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32393 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32401 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32402 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32405 \begin_layout Subsection
32409 \begin_layout Standard
32410 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32411 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32419 next to the standard index.
32421 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32422 that add this feature.
32429 \begin_inset Index idx
32432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32434 packages ! splitidx
32439 package to generate multiple indexes.
32440 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32446 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32448 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32456 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32457 style, but it also includes
32458 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32459 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32468 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32469 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32472 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32475 and select the option
32477 Use multiple Indexes
32484 already contains the standard index
32485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32493 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32494 also appear as a heading) to the
32498 input field and press the
32503 The new index now also appears in the list.
32504 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32505 label color to the new index.
32508 \begin_layout Standard
32509 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32513 List/Contents/References
32519 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32520 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32521 are additional features:
32524 \begin_layout Itemize
32525 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32526 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32529 \begin_layout Itemize
32530 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32531 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32536 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32537 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32538 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32539 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32542 \begin_layout Itemize
32547 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32548 code in the name of the index.
32551 \begin_layout Section
32552 Nomenclature/Glossary
32553 \begin_inset Index idx
32556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32563 \begin_inset Index idx
32566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32597 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32604 \begin_layout Standard
32605 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32606 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32607 called nomenclature or glossary.
32610 \begin_layout Standard
32611 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32618 \begin_inset Index idx
32621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32629 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32631 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32638 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32642 \begin_layout Standard
32643 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32644 and then use the menu
32646 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32652 \begin_inset space ~
32657 or the toolbar button
32660 arg "nomencl-insert"
32665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32676 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32679 \begin_layout Standard
32680 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32681 The first is the term or
32685 that you wish to define.
32690 of the term or symbol.
32693 \begin_layout Standard
32694 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32703 code for nomenclature entries the option
32707 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32715 \begin_layout Subsection
32716 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32717 \begin_inset Index idx
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 Nomenclature ! Layout
32729 \begin_layout Standard
32730 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32734 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32741 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32749 \begin_inset Newline newline
32757 \begin_inset Newline newline
32763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32770 character starts/ends the formula.
32771 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32772 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32784 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32794 \begin_layout Standard
32795 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32796 syntax is given in section
32797 \begin_inset space ~
32801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32803 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32810 \begin_layout Standard
32814 \begin_inset space ~
32819 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32821 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32826 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32833 in this document is:
32834 \begin_inset Newline newline
32839 dummy entry for the character
32844 \begin_inset Newline newline
32856 \begin_inset space ~
32866 font use the command
32895 \begin_layout Standard
32896 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32901 \begin_inset space \space{}
32905 \begin_inset Newline newline
32921 \begin_inset Newline newline
32924 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32925 This command will make the font of all symbols
32932 \begin_inset space ~
32940 \begin_layout Standard
32941 If the characters |
32942 \begin_inset space \space{}
32946 \begin_inset space \space{}
32950 \begin_inset space \space{}
32954 \begin_inset space \space{}
32958 \begin_inset space \space{}
32961 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32962 code they need to be escaped
32963 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32964 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32965 LatexCommand nomenclature
32966 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32967 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32975 \begin_layout Subsection
32976 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32977 \begin_inset Index idx
32980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32981 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32991 -code of the symbol
32993 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32995 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32998 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32999 LatexCommand nomenclature
33001 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33009 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33013 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33014 LatexCommand nomenclature
33017 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33023 They will be sorted by
33024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33050 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33053 will be sorted before the
33057 since the character
33058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33065 is considered in sorting.
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33069 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33072 \begin_inset space ~
33077 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33078 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33080 For the example given, you can insert
33084 in this field for the
33085 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33092 will be located before
33093 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33099 \begin_layout Standard
33100 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33105 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33115 \begin_layout Subsection
33116 Nomenclature Options
33117 \begin_inset Index idx
33120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33121 Nomenclature ! Options
33127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33129 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33136 \begin_layout Standard
33141 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33142 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33145 \begin_layout Description
33146 refeq Appends the phrase
33147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33162 to every nomenclature entry, where
33168 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33171 \begin_layout Description
33172 refpage Appends the phrase
33173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33188 to every nomenclature entry, where
33194 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
33197 \begin_layout Description
33198 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
33201 \begin_layout Standard
33202 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
33203 class options list in the
33205 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33209 In this document the options
33216 \begin_layout Standard
33217 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33223 \begin_layout Standard
33224 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
33225 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
33230 field in the nomenclature dialog:
33233 \begin_layout Description
33243 \begin_layout Description
33246 nomrefpage Like the
33253 \begin_layout Description
33256 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
33265 \begin_layout Description
33269 \begin_inset space ~
33275 \begin_inset space ~
33280 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
33283 \begin_layout Standard
33285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33292 are automatically translated for most document languages.
33293 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
33297 \begin_layout Standard
33306 \begin_inset Newline newline
33312 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33316 \begin_inset space ~
33328 unskip, see equation
33331 \begin_inset Newline newline
33338 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33339 \begin_inset Newline newline
33345 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33349 \begin_inset space ~
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33367 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
33370 \begin_inset space ~
33375 in the document settings under
33378 \begin_inset space ~
33386 \begin_layout Standard
33394 \begin_inset Newline newline
33398 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33402 \begin_inset space ~
33414 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33416 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33417 \begin_inset Newline newline
33424 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33425 \begin_inset Newline newline
33429 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33433 \begin_inset space ~
33445 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33450 \begin_layout Subsection
33451 Printing the Nomenclature
33452 \begin_inset Index idx
33455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33456 Nomenclature ! Printing
33464 \begin_layout Standard
33465 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33468 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33484 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33485 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33486 You can choose between these settings:
33489 \begin_layout Description
33490 Default a space of 1
33491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33497 \begin_layout Description
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33506 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33509 \begin_layout Description
33510 Custom custom space
33513 \begin_layout Standard
33514 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33523 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33531 For example, in order to change the name to
33535 , add the following line to the preamble:
33538 \begin_layout Standard
33551 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33554 \begin_layout Standard
33555 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33556 \begin_inset Newline newline
33571 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33574 \begin_layout Subsection
33575 Nomenclature Program
33576 \begin_inset Index idx
33579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33580 Nomenclature ! Program
33586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33588 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33595 \begin_layout Standard
33601 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33602 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33604 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33609 by adding options, see section
33610 \begin_inset space ~
33614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33616 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33621 The available options are listed and explained in
33622 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33624 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33632 \begin_layout Section
33634 \begin_inset Index idx
33637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33644 \begin_inset Index idx
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 Document ! Branches
33654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33656 name "sec:Branches"
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33665 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33666 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33667 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33670 \begin_layout Standard
33671 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33672 allows you to put text into branches.
33673 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33674 To create a branch, either select the menu
33676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33677 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33680 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33682 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33689 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33690 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33691 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33692 and whether the name of the branch should
33693 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33694 (see below for an example).
33695 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33696 to the name of the other) and to add
33697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33712 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33713 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33717 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33718 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33720 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33723 where you can choose a branch.
33724 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33728 \begin_layout Standard
33729 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33730 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33733 \begin_layout Standard
33734 \begin_inset Branch Question
33738 \begin_layout Standard
33743 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33752 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33756 \begin_layout Standard
33761 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33769 \begin_layout Standard
33776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33777 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33780 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33781 Consider for example a file
33782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33789 which has the above branches.
33791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33798 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33822 branch were inactive,
33823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33838 branch was active, likewise
33839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33854 branch was active, and
33855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33858 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33862 if both branches were active.
33863 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33864 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33870 \begin_layout Standard
33871 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33877 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33878 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33882 \begin_inset space ~
33890 \begin_layout Standard
33891 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33895 \begin_layout Standard
33901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33908 branch is deactivated.
33914 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33920 \begin_layout Standard
33921 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33922 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33923 definitions for each branch.
33924 For example you can define for the question branch
33928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33929 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33930 -syntax, see section
33931 \begin_inset space ~
33935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33937 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33959 \begin_layout Standard
33969 \begin_layout Standard
33970 and for the answer branch
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33983 \begin_layout Standard
33993 \begin_layout Standard
33994 \begin_inset Branch Question
33998 \begin_layout Standard
34002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 \begin_layout Standard
34031 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34035 \begin_layout Standard
34039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34067 \begin_layout Standard
34068 Now it is possible to use the
34072 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34079 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34082 commands to obtain conditional output.
34083 Here is an example formula where only the
34090 \begin_inset Formula
34092 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34100 \begin_layout Standard
34101 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34109 \begin_layout Standard
34110 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34116 \begin_inset space \space{}
34119 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34121 For this advanced usage, see the
34127 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34132 \begin_layout Section
34134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34136 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34141 \begin_inset Index idx
34144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34157 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34160 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34162 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34168 \begin_inset Index idx
34171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34173 packages ! hyperref
34178 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34179 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34180 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34181 part of the document.
34185 \begin_layout Standard
34186 The header information in the dialog tab
34190 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
34191 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
34192 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
34193 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
34197 \begin_inset space ~
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34206 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
34207 tries to extract the header information from your document title
34208 and author entries.
34212 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34220 \begin_inset space ~
34225 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
34228 \begin_layout Standard
34229 You can specify in the dialog tab
34233 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
34238 \begin_inset space ~
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34246 \begin_inset space ~
34251 option allows long links to be split;
34254 \begin_inset space ~
34258 \begin_inset space ~
34262 \begin_inset space ~
34270 \begin_inset space ~
34275 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
34278 \begin_inset space ~
34283 colors the different links.
34284 The default colors are:
34287 \begin_layout Labeling
34288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34293 for hyperlinks and URLs
34296 \begin_layout Labeling
34297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34305 \begin_layout Labeling
34306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
34314 \begin_layout Standard
34315 but you can change these in the field
34320 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
34323 \begin_layout Standard
34326 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
34329 \begin_layout Standard
34334 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
34335 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
34336 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
34339 \begin_layout Standard
34344 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
34345 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
34346 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
34356 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
34357 when opening the PDF.
34359 \begin_inset space ~
34362 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34366 1 will only display the sections.
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34370 PDF properties are also used in this document.
34371 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
34377 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34388 \begin_layout Section
34390 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34394 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34401 \begin_layout Subsection
34404 \begin_inset Index idx
34407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34417 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34424 \begin_layout Standard
34425 As \SpecialChar LyX
34426 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34427 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34428 commands and constructs,
34431 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34432 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34433 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34434 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34435 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34436 cannot support all packages and
34440 \begin_layout Standard
34441 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34442 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34443 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34447 Code box is created by the menu
34449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34451 \begin_inset space ~
34456 or by the toolbar button
34469 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34477 \begin_layout Standard
34478 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34480 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34482 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34492 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34499 , you can write the command part
34505 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34506 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34510 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34511 Code box behind the word.
34512 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34513 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 \begin_inset Graphics
34519 filename clipart/ERT.png
34527 \begin_layout Standard
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34532 This is a line with a
34536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34568 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34569 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34570 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34571 know that the command is finished.
34579 \begin_layout Subsection
34580 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34582 \begin_inset Argument 1
34585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34586 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34593 \begin_inset Index idx
34596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34606 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34613 \begin_layout Standard
34614 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34615 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34616 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34617 uses in the background.
34618 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34619 is based on commands, you can
34620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34628 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34629 any time if you know the right commands.
34630 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34631 is the end of the day.
34632 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34633 all caption labels bold.
34634 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34636 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34643 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34645 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34648 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34659 As result you find that the package
34664 \begin_inset Index idx
34667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34675 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34680 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34692 \begin_layout Standard
34697 usepackage[options]{package name}
34700 \begin_layout Standard
34701 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34702 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34703 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34704 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34707 \begin_layout Standard
34708 In your case the package name is
34713 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34718 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34719 So you add the command
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34727 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34730 \begin_layout Standard
34731 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34736 For more commands provided by the
34740 package, have a look at its documentation,
34741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34756 \begin_layout Standard
34757 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34759 For example if you use a
34763 class, you don't need the package
34767 , you can instead write
34770 \begin_layout Standard
34775 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34780 \begin_layout Standard
34781 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34782 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34783 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34790 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34793 \begin_layout Standard
34794 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34795 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34797 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34798 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34799 Code box as described in the previous
34803 \begin_layout Standard
34804 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34805 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34810 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34818 \begin_layout Standard
34819 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34825 \begin_layout Standard
34829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34839 \begin_inset Note Note
34842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34843 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34851 \begin_layout Left Header
34852 \begin_inset Argument 1
34855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34875 \begin_inset Note Note
34878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 defines the header line as described below
34887 \begin_layout Center Header
34888 \begin_inset Argument 1
34891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34900 \begin_layout Right Header
34901 \begin_inset Argument 1
34904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34925 \begin_layout Left Footer
34926 \begin_inset Argument 1
34929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34950 \begin_layout Center Footer
34951 \begin_inset Argument 1
34954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34966 \begin_inset Newline newline
34970 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34976 \begin_layout Right Footer
34977 \begin_inset Argument 1
34980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35002 \begin_layout Section
35003 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35006 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35011 \begin_inset Index idx
35014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35015 Document ! Header/Footer line
35021 \begin_inset Index idx
35024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35055 \begin_inset space ~
35061 As a second step add in the menu
35063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35064 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35073 Custom Header/Footerlines
35076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35080 This module offers the following 6
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35087 \begin_layout Description
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35093 \begin_inset space ~
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35105 \begin_inset space ~
35111 \begin_layout Description
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35117 \begin_inset space ~
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35129 \begin_inset space ~
35135 \begin_layout Standard
35136 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35137 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35140 \begin_layout Standard
35141 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35142 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35144 \begin_inset space ~
35148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35150 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35154 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35157 \begin_layout Standard
35158 \begin_inset Float figure
35165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35168 \begin_inset Tabular
35169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35171 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35173 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35193 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35222 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
35236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35237 The normal text on the page goes here.
35238 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
35240 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
35241 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
35246 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35255 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35284 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
35307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35331 \begin_inset Caption Standard
35333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35336 name "fig:Page-layout"
35340 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
35353 \begin_layout Standard
35354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35362 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35371 is set to “Default”.
35372 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35381 \begin_layout Subsection
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35386 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35387 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35388 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35389 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35391 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35393 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35396 \begin_layout Standard
35397 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35398 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35412 \begin_layout Description
35415 thepage prints the current page number
35418 \begin_layout Description
35421 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35424 \begin_layout Description
35427 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35430 \begin_layout Description
35433 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35434 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35441 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35444 because it usually goes in a left header.
35447 \begin_layout Description
35450 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35451 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35453 It is normally used in the right header.
35456 \begin_layout Subsection
35457 Default header/footer
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35461 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35462 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35463 footer has the page number.
35464 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35465 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35466 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35477 \begin_layout Subsection
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35483 Some pages are different.
35484 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35485 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35486 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35487 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35488 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35492 Header and footer decoration line
35495 \begin_layout Standard
35496 By default, you get a 0.4
35497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35500 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35501 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35513 in the following way:
35516 \begin_layout Standard
35523 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35526 \begin_layout Standard
35527 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35540 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35547 \begin_layout Standard
35548 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35550 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35551 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35566 Several header/footer lines
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35571 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35572 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35574 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35592 \begin_inset space ~
35600 \begin_layout Standard
35607 headheight}{height}
35610 \begin_layout Standard
35615 is a size in standard units (e.
35616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35620 \begin_inset space \space{}
35628 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35629 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35630 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35631 logfile with the menu
35633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35635 \begin_inset space ~
35643 \begin_inset space ~
35648 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35653 \begin_inset Index idx
35656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35658 packages ! fancyhdr
35664 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35665 for your header/footer.
35668 \begin_layout Subsection
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35673 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35674 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35675 This example consists of the following definition:
35678 \begin_layout Description
35680 \begin_inset space ~
35689 , empty optional argument
35692 \begin_layout Description
35694 \begin_inset space ~
35697 Header empty, empty optional argument
35700 \begin_layout Description
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35711 in the optional argument
35714 \begin_layout Description
35716 \begin_inset space ~
35725 in the optional argument
35728 \begin_layout Description
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35747 \begin_inset Newline newline
35751 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35758 in the optional argument
35761 \begin_layout Description
35763 \begin_inset space ~
35772 , empty optional argument
35775 \begin_layout Description
35778 headrulewidth set to 2
35779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35786 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35787 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35803 \begin_layout Standard
35804 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35818 pagestyle{headings}
35824 \begin_inset Note Note
35827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35828 switches back to page style with the default headings
35836 \begin_layout Section
35837 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35840 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35845 \begin_inset Index idx
35848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35855 \begin_inset Index idx
35858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35867 \begin_layout Standard
35869 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35870 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35871 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35874 \begin_layout Subsection
35878 \begin_layout Standard
35879 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35885 \begin_inset Index idx
35888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35890 packages ! preview-latex
35895 (on some systems named simply
35900 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35909 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35911 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35919 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35920 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35921 -package are automatically
35922 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35926 \begin_layout Subsection
35930 \begin_layout Standard
35931 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35932 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35934 activate the option
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35944 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35957 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35982 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35986 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35999 \begin_inset space ~
36007 \begin_layout Standard
36008 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36009 and when you finish
36013 \begin_layout Standard
36014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36022 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36023 generated by activating the option
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36032 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36040 \begin_layout Subsection
36041 Selected document parts
36044 \begin_layout Standard
36045 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36046 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36047 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36048 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36050 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36056 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36057 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36058 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36061 \begin_layout Standard
36062 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36069 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36081 is explained in section
36083 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36098 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36099 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36100 the final rotated boxes,
36101 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36102 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36104 Here is the result:
36107 \begin_layout Standard
36108 \begin_inset Preview
36110 \begin_layout Standard
36115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36119 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36125 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36135 height_special "totalheight"
36140 backgroundcolor "none"
36143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36168 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36174 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 Previewing works also for colors.
36198 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 is explained in section
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36237 \begin_layout Standard
36238 \begin_inset Preview
36240 \begin_layout Standard
36244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36263 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
36268 This is text within a colored, framed box.
36272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36287 \begin_layout Standard
36288 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
36294 \begin_layout Standard
36295 If \SpecialChar LyX
36296 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
36297 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
36298 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
36299 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36300 packages in your document preamble that are required by
36301 the \SpecialChar TeX
36303 If \SpecialChar LyX
36304 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
36305 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
36307 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
36308 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
36309 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
36312 \begin_layout Subsection
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36319 source of the whole document or parts of it.
36322 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
36324 \begin_inset space ~
36329 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36331 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
36333 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
36334 's main window, then only this selection
36335 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
36336 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
36337 the source view window.
36342 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
36343 ; but note that if you have
36344 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
36346 not just the one which is open at the time.
36349 \begin_layout Section
36350 Advanced Find and Replace
36351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36353 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36358 \begin_inset Index idx
36361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36368 \begin_inset Index idx
36371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36380 \begin_layout Subsection
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36386 allows for searching of complex,
36387 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36389 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36390 The key-features are:
36393 \begin_layout Itemize
36394 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36395 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36396 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36400 \begin_layout Itemize
36401 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36402 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36403 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36404 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36407 \begin_layout Itemize
36408 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36409 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36410 outside of mathematics environments
36413 \begin_layout Itemize
36414 Search may be widened to a specific
36419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36426 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36427 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36434 \begin_layout Itemize
36435 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36436 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36441 \begin_inset space ~
36444 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36447 \begin_layout Subsection
36451 \begin_layout Standard
36452 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36467 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36470 ) or the toolbar button
36473 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36479 Advanced Find and Replace
36484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36488 \begin_layout Standard
36494 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36503 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36506 arg "paragraph-break"
36510 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36511 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36515 arg "paragraph-break"
36518 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36522 searches backwards.
36525 \begin_layout Standard
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36534 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36548 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36552 Searching for mathematics
36555 \begin_layout Standard
36556 Mathematical formulas, such as
36557 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36560 or something more complex like
36561 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36564 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36569 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36570 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36571 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36572 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36583 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36584 This is done by switching to the
36588 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36593 This way, entering in the
36600 \begin_layout Itemize
36601 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36602 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36605 \begin_layout Itemize
36606 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36607 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36610 \begin_layout Itemize
36611 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36612 of it only within section headings.
36613 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36614 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36618 \begin_layout Itemize
36619 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36620 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36627 \begin_layout Standard
36628 The entries made in the
36632 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36635 \begin_inset space ~
36641 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36645 button or alternatively press
36648 arg "paragraph-break"
36655 while the cursor is in the
36658 \begin_inset space ~
36666 \begin_layout Standard
36667 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36669 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36673 \begin_layout Itemize
36674 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36675 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36683 with its typewriter version
36684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36698 \begin_layout Itemize
36699 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36705 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36717 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36724 (you may want to enable the
36727 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset space ~
36740 options and disable the
36748 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36756 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36757 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36761 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36764 , or occurrences of
36765 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36769 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36779 \begin_layout Standard
36780 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36785 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36789 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36799 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36805 This is done with the context menu
36807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36808 Insert Regular Expression
36810 while the cursor is in the
36815 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36816 expression matching rules
36820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36821 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36831 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36832 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36838 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36839 same text in the document.
36840 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36841 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36844 \begin_layout Enumerate
36845 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36850 editor the fraction
36851 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36855 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36858 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36859 fractions with the given denominator.
36862 \begin_layout Enumerate
36863 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36875 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36880 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36881 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36882 Also, by inserting a
36883 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36886 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36887 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36890 \begin_layout Standard
36891 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36892 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36893 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36896 , and referring back to them through
36897 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36901 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36905 For example, try searching with the regexp
36906 \begin_inset Newline newline
36909 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36912 \begin_inset Newline newline
36915 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36922 \begin_layout Standard
36923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36931 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36932 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36933 sub-expressions is absolute.
36935 \begin_inset space ~
36939 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36942 always refers to the first occurrence of
36943 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36946 in all entered regexps.
36954 \begin_layout Section
36956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36958 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36963 \begin_inset Index idx
36966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36977 has a built-in spell checker.
36980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36987 key or the toolbar button
36990 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36993 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36994 beginning of the currently selected text.
36995 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36996 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36997 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36998 scrolled so that it is visible.
36999 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37000 n, if any could be found.
37001 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37005 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37006 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37009 \begin_layout Standard
37010 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37017 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37018 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37020 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37021 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37024 \begin_inset space ~
37032 arg "dialog-show character"
37035 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37037 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37042 can be downloaded from here:
37043 \begin_inset Newline newline
37047 \begin_inset Flex URL
37050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37052 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37058 \begin_inset Newline newline
37062 \begin_inset space ~
37065 files for each language.
37066 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37067 \begin_inset space ~
37070 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37071 's installation subfolder
37079 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37081 \begin_inset Newline newline
37084 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37085 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37086 but in most cases these are
37102 is the language code.
37105 \begin_layout Subsection
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37112 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37113 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37118 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37121 you can set the following things:
37124 \begin_layout Description
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37129 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37130 should use for spell checking.
37131 Depending on your platform,
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37142 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37143 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37158 \begin_inset space ~
37161 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37164 \begin_layout Description
37166 \begin_inset space ~
37169 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37170 will always use the given language
37171 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37174 \begin_layout Description
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37179 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37185 \begin_inset space \space{}
37189 This should normally not be needed.
37192 \begin_layout Description
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37201 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
37203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37213 \begin_layout Description
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37218 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
37219 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
37220 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
37221 appear in a context menu.
37222 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
37226 \begin_layout Description
37228 \begin_inset space ~
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37239 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
37243 \begin_layout Section
37245 \begin_inset Index idx
37248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37257 name "sec:Thesaurus"
37264 \begin_layout Standard
37266 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
37267 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
37276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37277 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37279 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
37289 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
37291 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
37292 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
37293 which are available for many languages.
37296 \begin_layout Standard
37297 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
37298 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
37302 \begin_layout Subsection
37303 Setting up the thesaurus
37306 \begin_layout Standard
37315 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
37319 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
37324 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
37326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37338 For instance, the US English files are named:
37341 \begin_layout Itemize
37345 \begin_layout Itemize
37349 \begin_layout Standard
37358 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
37359 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
37362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37363 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37364 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37371 ) to the path where they are installed.
37375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37376 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
37377 ies, typical locations are
37383 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37387 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37391 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37394 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37400 LibreOffice-<Version>
37407 On the Mac, the default location is
37409 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37410 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37411 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37412 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37413 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37414 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37422 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37423 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37424 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37429 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37430 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37432 \begin_inset Newline newline
37436 \begin_inset Flex URL
37439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37441 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37449 \begin_layout Standard
37450 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37451 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37453 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37454 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37455 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37462 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37464 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37465 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37469 \begin_layout Standard
37470 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37472 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37475 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37481 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37484 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37485 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37494 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37495 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37502 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37505 \begin_layout Subsection
37506 Using the thesaurus
37509 \begin_layout Standard
37510 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37512 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37515 or the toolbar button
37518 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37521 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37523 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37525 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37526 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37527 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37536 ), related terms (such as
37539 \begin_inset space ~
37548 ), compounds (such as
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37560 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37569 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37572 \begin_layout Standard
37573 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37574 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37578 \begin_layout Standard
37579 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37580 the dictionary, such as the above
37584 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37589 \begin_inset space \space{}
37592 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37593 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37594 For example, looking up the word form
37598 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37603 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37608 \begin_inset space \space{}
37619 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37620 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37621 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37624 \begin_layout Section
37626 \begin_inset Index idx
37629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37636 \begin_inset Index idx
37639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37640 Document ! Change Tracking
37646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37648 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37655 \begin_layout Standard
37656 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37657 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37658 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37659 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37666 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37676 \begin_layout Standard
37677 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37691 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37692 You can change the color in
37694 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37695 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37697 \begin_inset space ~
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37706 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37712 \begin_inset Index idx
37715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37716 Color ! Change tracking
37721 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37722 's status bar when the
37723 cursor is in changed text.
37724 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37727 arg "changes-merge"
37733 \begin_layout Standard
37734 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37736 \begin_inset Index idx
37739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37748 \begin_layout Standard
37749 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 \begin_inset Graphics
37757 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37766 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37777 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37783 \begin_layout Standard
37784 \begin_inset Tabular
37785 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37786 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37787 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37789 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37798 arg "changes-track"
37806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37812 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37817 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37837 arg "changes-output"
37845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37856 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37862 \begin_inset space ~
37866 \begin_inset space ~
37875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37896 Jumps to the next change
37902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37911 arg "change-accept"
37919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37927 \begin_inset space ~
37930 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37950 arg "change-reject"
37958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37966 \begin_inset space ~
37969 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37971 \begin_inset space ~
37980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37989 arg "changes-merge"
37997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38005 \begin_inset space ~
38008 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38028 arg "all-changes-accept"
38036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38047 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38049 \begin_inset space ~
38053 \begin_inset space ~
38062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38071 arg "all-changes-reject"
38079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38090 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38092 \begin_inset space ~
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38129 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38131 \begin_inset space ~
38140 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38163 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38165 \begin_inset space ~
38181 \begin_layout Standard
38182 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38210 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
38211 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
38212 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
38213 the next change after the current cursor position.
38214 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
38215 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
38216 step to the next change.
38217 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
38222 to describe a change.
38225 \begin_layout Standard
38227 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
38228 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38234 \begin_inset Index idx
38237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38245 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
38247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38254 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38260 \begin_layout Section
38261 Comparison of Documents
38262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38264 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38269 \begin_inset Index idx
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38273 Comparison of documents
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38282 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
38285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38289 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
38290 file with change tracking enabled showing the
38292 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
38294 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38302 \begin_inset space ~
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38315 \begin_inset space ~
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38327 \begin_inset space ~
38331 \begin_inset space ~
38335 \begin_inset space ~
38340 enables the change tracking option
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset space ~
38356 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
38359 \begin_layout Section
38360 International Support
38361 \begin_inset Index idx
38364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 International support
38373 \begin_layout Standard
38374 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
38375 with any language you want.
38376 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
38377 up \SpecialChar LyX
38379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38381 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38389 \begin_layout Standard
38390 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38391 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38398 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38405 \begin_layout Subsection
38407 \begin_inset Index idx
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 \begin_inset Index idx
38420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 Document ! Settings
38427 \begin_inset Index idx
38430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38431 Document ! Language
38439 \begin_layout Standard
38442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38443 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38446 dialog lets you set
38448 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38453 \begin_layout Standard
38458 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38468 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38469 For details about the different encoding options see section
38470 \begin_inset space ~
38474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38476 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38483 \begin_layout Subsection
38484 Keyboard mapping configuration
38485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38487 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38494 \begin_layout Standard
38495 If you have for example a U.
38496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38499 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38500 can use an alternate keymap.
38501 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38507 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38508 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38511 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38518 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38523 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38524 which one you want to use.
38527 \begin_layout Standard
38528 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38529 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38530 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38534 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38535 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38536 one to support the characters you want.
38537 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38544 \begin_layout Chapter
38547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38549 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38556 \begin_layout Standard
38557 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38558 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38559 topic inside the user's guide.
38562 \begin_layout Section
38564 \begin_inset Index idx
38567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38576 \begin_layout Standard
38581 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38584 \begin_layout Subsection
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38589 Creates a new document.
38592 \begin_layout Subsection
38596 \begin_layout Standard
38597 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38598 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38599 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38601 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
38602 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
38608 \begin_layout Subsection
38612 \begin_layout Standard
38616 \begin_layout Subsection
38620 \begin_layout Standard
38621 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38622 Click there on a file to open it.
38625 \begin_layout Subsection
38627 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
38631 \begin_layout Standard
38633 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
38634 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
38638 \begin_layout Subsection
38642 \begin_layout Standard
38643 Closes the current document.
38646 \begin_layout Subsection
38650 \begin_layout Standard
38651 Closes all opened documents.
38654 \begin_layout Subsection
38658 \begin_layout Standard
38659 Saves the actual document.
38662 \begin_layout Subsection
38666 \begin_layout Standard
38667 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38668 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
38672 \begin_layout Subsection
38674 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
38678 \begin_layout Standard
38680 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
38681 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
38687 \begin_layout Subsection
38691 \begin_layout Standard
38692 Saves all opened documents.
38695 \begin_layout Subsection
38699 \begin_layout Standard
38700 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38703 \begin_layout Subsection
38707 \begin_layout Standard
38708 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38709 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38710 It is described in the section
38712 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38717 Additional Features
38722 \begin_layout Subsection
38726 \begin_layout Standard
38727 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38728 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38730 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38731 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38735 \begin_layout Standard
38736 When using the menu entry
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38744 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38756 \begin_inset space ~
38761 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38762 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38765 \begin_layout Subsection
38767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38769 name "subsec:Export"
38776 \begin_layout Standard
38777 You can export your document to various file formats.
38778 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38780 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38781 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38782 during its configuration.
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38786 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38788 \begin_inset space ~
38792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38794 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38801 \begin_layout Description
38807 \begin_inset space ~
38810 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38812 \begin_inset space ~
38815 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38816 \begin_inset Newline newline
38819 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38820 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38824 \begin_layout Description
38825 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38831 \begin_layout Description
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38836 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38842 \begin_layout Description
38843 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38844 's native DVI-format.
38845 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38846 files paths or file names in your document.
38848 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38855 \begin_layout Description
38856 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
38857 in files paths or file names
38860 \begin_layout Description
38862 \begin_inset space ~
38869 ) DVI-format using the program
38871 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38874 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38886 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38894 \begin_layout Description
38896 \begin_inset space ~
38899 (cropped) the same as
38903 but with cropped page margins.
38906 \begin_layout Description
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38911 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38915 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38920 \begin_layout Description
38924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38932 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38940 \begin_layout Description
38942 \begin_inset space ~
38946 \begin_inset space ~
38949 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38953 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38961 \begin_layout Description
38965 \begin_inset space ~
38974 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38975 source that is compilable with the program
38977 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38981 \begin_layout Description
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38990 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38991 source, additionally all images used in the document
38992 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38996 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38999 \begin_layout Description
39003 \begin_inset space ~
39008 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39009 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39010 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39018 \begin_layout Description
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39031 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39032 source that is compilable with the program
39038 \begin_layout Description
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39044 \begin_inset space ~
39051 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39052 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39058 \begin_layout Description
39060 \begin_inset space ~
39063 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39064 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39070 \begin_inset space \space{}
39075 \begin_inset space ~
39079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39094 represent the version number)
39097 \begin_layout Description
39099 \begin_inset space ~
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39106 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39107 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39108 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39112 \begin_layout Description
39113 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39114 's internal XHTML engine
39117 \begin_layout Description
39119 \begin_inset space ~
39123 \begin_inset space ~
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39134 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39139 For the conversion the program
39148 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39151 \begin_layout Description
39152 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39157 \begin_layout Description
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39162 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39164 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39167 For the conversion the program
39176 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39179 \begin_layout Description
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39184 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39185 For the conversion the program
39194 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39197 \begin_layout Description
39199 \begin_inset space ~
39202 (cropped) the same as
39205 \begin_inset space ~
39210 but with cropped page margins
39213 \begin_layout Description
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39222 PDF-format using the program
39226 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39229 \begin_layout Description
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39237 \begin_inset space ~
39245 \begin_inset space ~
39250 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
39251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39255 \begin_inset space \space{}
39258 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
39262 \begin_layout Description
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39271 PDF-format using the program
39273 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39276 , produces PDF-files directly
39279 \begin_layout Description
39283 \begin_inset space ~
39288 PDF-format using the program
39292 , produces PDF-files directly
39295 \begin_layout Description
39299 \begin_inset space ~
39304 PDF-format using the program
39308 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
39311 \begin_layout Description
39315 \begin_inset space ~
39320 PDF-format using the program
39325 , produces PDF-files directly
39328 \begin_layout Description
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39340 \begin_layout Description
39344 \begin_inset space ~
39348 \begin_inset space ~
39353 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
39354 and then exported as text using the program
39359 \begin_layout Description
39364 PostScript format using the program
39372 options see section
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39379 reference "subsec:General-output"
39386 \begin_layout Description
39387 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39388 source and also code in the statistical programming
39402 it is possible to use
39406 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
39410 \begin_layout Standard
39411 If one of the menu entries
39418 \begin_inset space ~
39427 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39429 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39431 \begin_inset space ~
39435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39437 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39442 \begin_inset Index idx
39445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39446 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39455 \begin_layout Subsection
39459 \begin_layout Standard
39460 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39461 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39470 reference "sec:Paths"
39475 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39484 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39485 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39486 's preferences as described in section
39487 \begin_inset space ~
39491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39493 reference "subsec:Converters"
39500 \begin_layout Subsection
39501 New and Close Window
39504 \begin_layout Standard
39505 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39509 \begin_layout Subsection
39513 \begin_layout Standard
39514 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39517 \begin_layout Section
39519 \begin_inset Index idx
39522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39531 \begin_layout Subsection
39535 \begin_layout Standard
39536 Described in section
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39543 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39550 \begin_layout Subsection
39551 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39554 \begin_layout Standard
39555 Described in section
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39562 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39569 \begin_layout Subsection
39573 \begin_layout Standard
39574 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39575 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39578 \begin_layout Subsection
39582 \begin_layout Standard
39583 Selects the whole document.
39586 \begin_layout Subsection
39587 Find & Replace (Quick)
39590 \begin_layout Standard
39591 Described in section
39592 \begin_inset space ~
39596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39598 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39605 \begin_layout Subsection
39606 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39609 \begin_layout Standard
39610 Described in section
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39617 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39624 \begin_layout Subsection
39625 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39628 \begin_layout Standard
39629 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39633 \begin_layout Subsection
39635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39639 \begin_layout Standard
39641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39642 Described in section
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39649 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39658 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_inset Index idx
39663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39664 Paragraph ! Settings
39672 \begin_layout Standard
39673 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39674 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39679 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39680 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39687 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39695 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39699 \begin_layout Subsection
39701 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39705 \begin_layout Standard
39707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39708 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39713 \begin_layout Enumerate
39715 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39716 Customize text properties by means of the
39722 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39725 ; this is described in section
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39732 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39739 \begin_layout Enumerate
39741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39742 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39744 Apply last settings
39747 \begin_layout Enumerate
39749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39750 Change the casing of selected text (
39765 \begin_layout Subsection
39767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39771 \begin_layout Standard
39773 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39774 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39775 text styles (in the case of this document:
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39803 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39812 \begin_layout Subsection
39813 Table and Rows & Columns
39816 \begin_layout Standard
39817 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39818 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39819 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39822 \begin_layout Subsection
39826 \begin_layout Standard
39827 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39828 It will dissolve this inset.
39829 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39833 \begin_layout Subsection
39837 \begin_layout Standard
39838 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39839 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39842 \begin_layout Subsection
39843 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39846 \begin_layout Standard
39847 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39849 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39850 \begin_inset space ~
39854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39856 reference "sec:Nesting"
39861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39863 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39870 \begin_layout Section
39872 \begin_inset Index idx
39875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 At the bottom of the
39889 menu the opened documents are listed.
39892 \begin_layout Subsection
39893 Open/Close all Insets
39896 \begin_layout Standard
39897 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39900 \begin_layout Subsection
39901 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39904 \begin_layout Standard
39905 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39908 \begin_layout Standard
39909 Math macros are described in the
39916 \begin_layout Subsection
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39922 \begin_inset space ~
39926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39928 reference "sec:Navigating"
39933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39935 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39942 \begin_layout Subsection
39946 \begin_layout Standard
39947 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39955 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39962 \begin_layout Subsection
39966 \begin_layout Standard
39967 Opens a window showing console messages.
39968 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39973 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39974 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39975 is processing the document.
39978 \begin_layout Subsection
39980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39982 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39987 \begin_inset Index idx
39990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40002 All toolbars and the
40005 \begin_inset space ~
40010 can be turned on and off.
40015 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40044 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40048 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40055 \begin_layout Standard
40060 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40064 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40065 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40066 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40067 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40068 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40071 \begin_layout Standard
40073 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40080 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40087 \begin_layout Subsection
40091 \begin_layout Standard
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40099 \begin_inset space ~
40103 \begin_inset space ~
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40120 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40121 's main window vertically while
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40128 \begin_inset space ~
40132 \begin_inset space ~
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40149 will split it horizontally.
40150 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40151 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40152 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40153 three or more documents at the same time.
40154 To close a split view, use the menu
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_layout Subsection
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 Closes a split view.
40177 \begin_layout Subsection
40181 \begin_layout Standard
40182 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40183 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40184 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40185 's main window fullscreen.
40186 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40187 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
40190 \begin_layout Section
40192 \begin_inset Index idx
40195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40204 \begin_layout Subsection
40208 \begin_layout Standard
40209 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40216 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
40227 \begin_layout Subsection
40229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40231 name "subsec:Special-Character"
40238 \begin_layout Standard
40239 Here you can insert the following characters:
40242 \begin_layout Description
40247 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
40250 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
40251 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40252 -packages you have installed.
40253 You can get a complete display by checking
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40262 \begin_inset Newline newline
40266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40274 Not all characters will be visible in the
40278 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
40279 dialog (see section
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40286 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
40290 ) can display every character.
40298 \begin_layout Description
40299 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
40303 \begin_layout Description
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40312 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40319 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
40326 \begin_layout Description
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40331 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
40334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40341 \begin_layout Description
40343 \begin_inset space ~
40346 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
40349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40356 \begin_layout Description
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40361 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
40365 \begin_layout Description
40367 \begin_inset space ~
40370 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
40374 \begin_layout Description
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40379 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
40385 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40391 \begin_layout Description
40393 \begin_inset space ~
40396 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
40400 \begin_layout Description
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_inset Index idx
40409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40416 \begin_inset Index idx
40419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40420 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40425 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40426 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40428 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40434 \begin_inset Index idx
40437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40445 \begin_inset Newline newline
40448 More information about this feature can be found in the
40454 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40460 \begin_layout Description
40461 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40463 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40464 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40468 \begin_layout Subsection
40472 \begin_layout Standard
40473 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40476 \begin_layout Description
40477 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40478 \begin_inset script superscript
40480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40489 \begin_layout Description
40490 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40491 \begin_inset script subscript
40493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40502 \begin_layout Description
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40507 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40514 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40521 \begin_layout Description
40523 \begin_inset space ~
40526 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40533 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40540 \begin_layout Description
40542 \begin_inset space ~
40545 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40546 \begin_inset space ~
40550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40552 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40559 \begin_layout Description
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40564 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40570 \begin_inset space \space{}
40573 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40574 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40583 To insert a fraction use the command
40588 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40592 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40601 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40608 \begin_layout Description
40610 \begin_inset space ~
40613 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40620 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40627 \begin_layout Description
40629 \begin_inset space ~
40632 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40633 \begin_inset space ~
40637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40639 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40646 \begin_layout Description
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40651 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40658 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40665 \begin_layout Description
40666 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40673 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40680 \begin_layout Description
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40685 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40686 \begin_inset space ~
40690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40692 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40699 \begin_layout Description
40701 \begin_inset space ~
40704 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40705 \begin_inset space ~
40709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40711 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40718 \begin_layout Description
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40727 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40730 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40736 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40743 for a usage example.
40746 \begin_layout Description
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40755 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40762 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40769 \begin_layout Description
40771 \begin_inset space ~
40774 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40775 as described in section
40776 \begin_inset space ~
40780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40782 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40789 \begin_layout Description
40791 \begin_inset space ~
40794 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40801 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40808 \begin_layout Description
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40813 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40814 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40816 \begin_inset space ~
40820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40822 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40829 \begin_layout Description
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40834 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40841 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40848 \begin_layout Description
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40854 \begin_inset space ~
40857 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40858 \begin_inset space ~
40862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40864 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40871 \begin_layout Subsection
40873 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40877 \begin_layout Standard
40879 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40880 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40881 The submenu allows you to insert
40884 \begin_layout Description
40886 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40888 \begin_inset space ~
40891 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40894 \begin_layout Description
40896 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40898 \begin_inset space ~
40902 \begin_inset space ~
40905 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40909 \begin_layout Description
40911 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40916 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40919 \begin_layout Description
40921 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40926 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40929 \begin_layout Description
40931 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40933 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_inset space ~
40940 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40944 \begin_layout Description
40946 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40951 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40954 \begin_layout Description
40956 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40969 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40972 \begin_layout Description
40974 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40979 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40981 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40982 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40988 \begin_layout Description
40990 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40995 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40997 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40998 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41004 \begin_layout Description
41006 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41007 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41008 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41009 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41012 \begin_layout Subsection
41015 List/Contents/References
41018 \begin_layout Standard
41019 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41044 are described in section
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41051 reference "sec:toc"
41060 is described in section
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41067 reference "sec:Index"
41075 is described in section
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41082 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41088 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41091 is described in section
41092 \begin_inset space ~
41096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41098 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41105 \begin_layout Subsection
41109 \begin_layout Standard
41110 To insert floats, as described in section
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41117 reference "sec:Floats"
41121 and in detail the chapter
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_layout Subsection
41140 \begin_layout Standard
41141 To insert notes, described in section
41142 \begin_inset space ~
41146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41148 reference "sec:Notes"
41155 \begin_layout Subsection
41159 \begin_layout Standard
41160 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
41162 Branches are described in section
41163 \begin_inset space ~
41167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41169 reference "sec:Branches"
41176 \begin_layout Subsection
41180 \begin_layout Standard
41181 Inserts document class-specific insets.
41182 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
41184 An example is the document class
41185 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
41187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41195 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
41199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41204 with three custom insets.
41207 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41211 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
41217 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
41220 \begin_layout Subsection
41222 \begin_inset Index idx
41225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41234 \begin_layout Standard
41235 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
41237 For more information see chapter
41239 External Document Parts
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41248 \begin_layout Subsection
41250 \begin_inset Index idx
41253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 \begin_layout Standard
41263 Inserts a box in a certain style.
41264 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
41271 \begin_inset space ~
41279 \begin_layout Subsection
41283 \begin_layout Standard
41288 dialog as described in section
41289 \begin_inset space ~
41293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41295 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41302 \begin_layout Subsection
41306 \begin_layout Standard
41311 as described in section
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41318 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41325 \begin_layout Subsection
41329 \begin_layout Standard
41334 as described in section
41335 \begin_inset space ~
41339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41341 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41348 \begin_layout Subsection
41350 \begin_inset Index idx
41353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41360 \begin_inset Index idx
41363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41364 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
41372 \begin_layout Standard
41373 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
41374 Floats are described in section
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41381 reference "sec:Floats"
41385 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
41387 Multi-page Captions
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41400 \begin_layout Subsection
41404 \begin_layout Standard
41405 Inserts an index entry as described in section
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41412 reference "sec:Index"
41419 \begin_layout Subsection
41423 \begin_layout Standard
41424 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41431 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41438 \begin_layout Subsection
41442 \begin_layout Standard
41443 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41444 Tables are described in section
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41451 reference "sec:Tables"
41455 and in detail in the chapter
41462 \begin_inset space ~
41470 \begin_layout Subsection
41474 \begin_layout Standard
41480 Graphics are described in section
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41487 reference "sec:Graphics"
41494 \begin_layout Subsection
41498 \begin_layout Standard
41499 Inserts a URL as described in section
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41506 reference "subsec:URLs"
41513 \begin_layout Subsection
41517 \begin_layout Standard
41518 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41525 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41532 \begin_layout Subsection
41536 \begin_layout Standard
41537 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41544 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41551 \begin_layout Subsection
41555 \begin_layout Standard
41556 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41563 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41570 \begin_layout Subsection
41573 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41576 \begin_layout Standard
41577 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41578 environments of the same type.
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41586 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41590 for an explanation.
41593 \begin_layout Subsection
41597 \begin_layout Standard
41598 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41599 title or caption of a float.
41600 Inserts a short title as described in section
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41607 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41614 \begin_layout Subsection
41619 \begin_layout Standard
41620 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41621 Code box as described in section
41622 \begin_inset space ~
41626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41628 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41635 \begin_layout Subsection
41637 \begin_inset Index idx
41640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41650 Inserts a program listings box.
41651 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41653 Program Code Listings
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41666 \begin_layout Subsection
41668 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41672 \begin_layout Standard
41674 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41675 Inserts the actual date.
41676 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41683 \begin_layout Subsection
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41689 \begin_inset space ~
41693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41695 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41702 \begin_layout Section
41704 \begin_inset Index idx
41707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41716 \begin_layout Standard
41717 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41721 of the current document.
41722 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41725 \begin_layout Subsection
41729 \begin_layout Standard
41730 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41731 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41732 to jump, for example, between section
41733 \begin_inset space ~
41737 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41741 2.5 and use the submenu
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41755 \begin_inset space ~
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41771 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41775 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41781 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41784 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41787 \begin_layout Standard
41788 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41797 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41800 \begin_inset space ~
41805 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41808 \begin_layout Subsection
41809 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41812 \begin_layout Standard
41813 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41817 \begin_layout Subsection
41821 \begin_layout Standard
41822 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41823 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41824 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41828 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41840 \begin_layout Subsection
41844 \begin_layout Standard
41845 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41848 The \SpecialChar LyX
41849 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41864 manual for a detailed description.
41867 \begin_layout Section
41869 \begin_inset Index idx
41872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41881 \begin_layout Subsection
41885 \begin_layout Standard
41886 Change Tracking is described in section
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41893 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41900 \begin_layout Subsection
41908 \begin_layout Standard
41909 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41910 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41911 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41913 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41914 to the clipboard or update the view.
41915 \begin_inset Newline newline
41918 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41922 \begin_layout Standard
41925 Open Containing Directory
41927 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41928 's temporary folder for the document.
41929 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41930 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41931 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41932 For example some journals require to send the
41936 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41940 \begin_layout Subsection
41941 Start Appendix Here
41944 \begin_layout Standard
41945 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41946 as described in section
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41953 reference "sec:Appendices"
41960 \begin_layout Subsection
41962 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_layout Standard
41969 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41970 default output format for the document (menu
41972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41974 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41976 \begin_inset space ~
41980 \begin_inset space ~
41986 \begin_inset space ~
41990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41992 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41996 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41999 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42000 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42002 \begin_inset space ~
42005 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42007 \begin_inset space ~
42010 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42012 \begin_inset space ~
42016 \begin_inset space ~
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42028 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42032 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42033 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42035 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42036 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42038 \begin_inset space ~
42041 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42043 \begin_inset space ~
42046 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42050 \begin_inset space ~
42054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42056 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42061 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42062 when it is first configured.
42063 The default output format is
42066 \begin_inset space ~
42074 \begin_layout Subsection
42075 View (Other Formats)
42078 \begin_layout Standard
42079 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42080 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42081 actual document with an external program.
42082 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42083 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42084 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42086 All possible formats are listed in section
42087 \begin_inset space ~
42091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42093 reference "subsec:Export"
42098 You should at least see the menu entry
42103 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42105 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42113 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42118 \begin_inset Index idx
42121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42122 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42131 \begin_layout Standard
42132 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
42133 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42135 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42136 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42138 \begin_inset space ~
42141 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42146 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42150 \begin_inset space ~
42154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42156 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42161 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42162 when it is first configured.
42165 \begin_layout Subsection
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42173 \begin_layout Standard
42174 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
42175 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
42178 \begin_layout Subsection
42179 Update (Other Formats)
42182 \begin_layout Standard
42183 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
42184 your document without opening a new viewer window.
42187 \begin_layout Subsection
42188 View Master Document
42191 \begin_layout Standard
42192 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42208 \begin_inset space ~
42213 manual for more information on this topic).
42214 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
42215 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42223 \begin_inset space ~
42228 generates the output of the whole book, while
42232 will just output the chapter alone.
42235 \begin_layout Standard
42236 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42237 in the document settings (menu
42239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42241 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_inset space ~
42257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42259 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42263 ) or in the preferences (menu
42265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42266 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42271 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42276 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42278 \begin_inset space ~
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42288 \begin_inset space ~
42292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42294 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42301 \begin_layout Subsection
42302 Update Master Document
42305 \begin_layout Standard
42306 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
42308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42322 \begin_inset space ~
42327 manual for more information on this topic).
42328 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
42329 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
42332 \begin_layout Standard
42333 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
42334 in the document settings (menu
42336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42337 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42338 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42340 \begin_inset space ~
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42356 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42360 ) or in the preferences (menu
42362 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42363 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42368 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42370 \begin_inset space ~
42373 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42385 \begin_inset space ~
42389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42391 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42398 \begin_layout Subsection
42400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42402 name "subsec:Compressed"
42409 \begin_layout Standard
42410 Un/compresses the current document.
42411 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
42412 compression (see the
42414 Additional Features
42416 manual for details).
42419 \begin_layout Subsection
42423 \begin_layout Standard
42424 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
42427 \begin_layout Subsection
42431 \begin_layout Standard
42432 The document settings are described in appendix
42433 \begin_inset space ~
42437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42439 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42446 \begin_layout Section
42448 \begin_inset Index idx
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42460 \begin_layout Subsection
42464 \begin_layout Standard
42465 Spell checking is explained in section
42466 \begin_inset space ~
42470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42472 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42479 \begin_layout Subsection
42483 \begin_layout Standard
42484 The thesaurus is described in section
42485 \begin_inset space ~
42489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42491 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42498 \begin_layout Subsection
42500 \begin_inset Index idx
42503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42510 \begin_inset Index idx
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42522 \begin_layout Standard
42523 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42524 the highlighted document part.
42527 \begin_layout Subsection
42533 \begin_inset Index idx
42536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42546 \begin_layout Standard
42547 Generates with the help of the program
42549 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42552 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42553 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42554 This feature is not available on Windows.
42557 \begin_layout Subsection
42563 \begin_inset Index idx
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42576 \begin_layout Standard
42577 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42582 \begin_inset space ~
42587 to see the full filename paths.
42590 \begin_layout Subsection
42592 \begin_inset Index idx
42595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42604 \begin_layout Standard
42605 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42606 files as described in section
42607 \begin_inset space ~
42611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42613 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42620 \begin_layout Subsection
42622 \begin_inset Index idx
42625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42638 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42656 \begin_inset Index idx
42659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42660 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42669 \begin_layout Standard
42670 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42671 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42672 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42673 -packages and programs it needs; see
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42681 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42688 \begin_layout Subsection
42692 \begin_layout Standard
42697 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42704 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42711 \begin_layout Section
42713 \begin_inset Index idx
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42725 \begin_layout Standard
42726 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42727 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42729 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42733 \begin_layout Standard
42737 \begin_inset space ~
42742 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42743 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42744 packages and classes found
42745 by \SpecialChar LyX
42747 \begin_inset space ~
42751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42753 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42760 \begin_layout Standard
42764 \begin_inset space ~
42769 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42774 \begin_layout Section
42776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42778 name "sec:Toolbars"
42785 \begin_layout Standard
42786 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42787 \begin_inset space ~
42791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42793 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42800 \begin_layout Standard
42801 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42802 This is described in the
42804 Additional Features
42809 \begin_layout Subsection
42811 \begin_inset Index idx
42814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42823 \begin_layout Standard
42824 \begin_inset Graphics
42825 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42840 \begin_layout Standard
42841 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42858 \begin_inset Note Note
42861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42862 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42867 manual for more information.
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42876 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42882 \begin_layout Standard
42883 \begin_inset Tabular
42884 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42885 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42886 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42887 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42893 \begin_inset Graphics
42894 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42908 pull-down box for the environments
42921 \begin_layout Standard
42922 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42930 \begin_inset Tabular
42931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42932 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42933 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42934 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42958 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42988 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43018 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43034 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43048 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 arg "spelling-continuously"
43072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43076 Spellcheck continuously
43082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43105 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43135 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43165 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43195 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43227 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
43232 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43250 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
43258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43290 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
43298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43323 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43332 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
43340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43347 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
43354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43375 Emphasize text, function of the
43376 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
43379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43381 \begin_inset space ~
43384 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
43392 arg "dialog-show character"
43403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43424 Set text to noun style, function of the
43425 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
43428 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43430 \begin_inset space ~
43433 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43441 arg "dialog-show character"
43452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43458 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43461 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43474 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43490 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43495 arg "textstyle-apply"
43505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43511 Format text using the current settings in the
43513 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43518 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43553 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43564 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43573 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43601 arg "tabular-insert"
43609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43631 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43644 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43663 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43675 Toggle outline window on/off,
43677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43693 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43705 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43720 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43732 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43745 \begin_layout Subsection
43747 \begin_inset Index idx
43750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43759 \begin_layout Standard
43760 \begin_inset Graphics
43761 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43769 \begin_layout Standard
43770 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43776 \begin_layout Standard
43777 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43781 \begin_layout Standard
43782 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43788 \begin_layout Standard
43789 \begin_inset Tabular
43790 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43791 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43792 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43793 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43821 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43830 arg "layout Enumerate"
43838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43857 arg "layout Itemize"
43865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43911 arg "layout Description"
43919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 arg "depth-increment"
43946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43954 \begin_inset space ~
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43976 arg "depth-decrement"
43984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43992 \begin_inset space ~
43996 \begin_inset space ~
44005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44014 arg "float-insert figure"
44022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44029 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44045 arg "float-insert table"
44053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44060 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44067 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44090 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44106 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44136 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
44144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44182 \begin_inset space ~
44191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 arg "nomencl-insert"
44208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44225 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44234 arg "footnote-insert"
44242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44264 arg "marginalnote-insert"
44272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44280 \begin_inset space ~
44289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44313 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44333 arg "box-insert Frameless"
44341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44427 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44442 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44458 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44473 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44475 \begin_inset space ~
44484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44493 arg "dialog-show character"
44501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 \begin_inset space ~
44512 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44525 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44530 arg "textstyle-apply"
44538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44543 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44544 Format text using the recent settings in the
44547 arg "dialog-show character"
44556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44565 arg "layout-paragraph"
44573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44581 \begin_inset space ~
44590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44599 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44627 \begin_layout Subsection
44628 View/Update Toolbar
44629 \begin_inset Index idx
44632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44633 Toolbar ! View / Update
44641 \begin_layout Standard
44642 \begin_inset Graphics
44643 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44650 \begin_layout Standard
44651 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44657 \begin_layout Standard
44658 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44662 \begin_layout Standard
44663 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44669 \begin_layout Standard
44670 \begin_inset Tabular
44671 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44672 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44673 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44674 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44714 arg "buffer-update"
44722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44744 arg "master-buffer-view"
44752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44760 \begin_inset space ~
44769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 arg "master-buffer-update"
44786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44798 \begin_inset space ~
44807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44831 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44832 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44833 Synchronize with Output
44839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44850 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44867 View (Other Formats)
44873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44880 arg "update-others"
44884 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44899 Update (Other Formats)
44912 \begin_layout Standard
44914 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44915 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44921 \begin_layout Subsection
44925 \begin_layout Standard
44926 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44933 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44937 , the table toolbar
44938 \begin_inset Index idx
44941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44950 \begin_inset space ~
44955 manual and the math macro toolbar
44956 \begin_inset Index idx
44959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44972 \begin_layout Chapter
44973 The Document Settings
44974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44976 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44981 \begin_inset Index idx
44984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44985 Document ! Settings
44993 \begin_layout Standard
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45002 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45003 is called with the menu
45005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45009 You can save your document settings as default with the
45011 Save as Document Defaults
45013 button in any dialog.
45014 This will create a template named
45018 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45019 when you create a new document without
45023 \begin_layout Standard
45028 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45029 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45032 \begin_layout Standard
45033 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45034 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45035 to find the one you are looking for.
45036 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45037 the submenus of the dialog.
45039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45043 \begin_inset space \space{}
45047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45054 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45055 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45056 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45059 \begin_layout Section
45063 \begin_layout Standard
45064 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45066 Document classes are described in section
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45073 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45081 \begin_layout Standard
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45090 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45095 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45096 as a layout for a document class.
45097 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45099 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45108 \begin_layout Standard
45109 Some classes use special class options by default.
45110 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45114 and you can decide to use them or not.
45115 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45116 recommended you leave them untouched.
45121 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45122 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45127 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45129 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
45134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45135 When you want to use one of the following drivers
45136 \begin_inset Newline newline
45141 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
45144 \begin_inset Newline newline
45147 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45148 distribution, see section
45153 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45155 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
45168 \begin_layout Standard
45173 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
45174 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
45175 in the background if the child document
45176 is opened without its master.
45177 This way child documents are always compilable.
45178 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45193 \begin_layout Standard
45194 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45205 \begin_inset Index idx
45208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45210 packages ! prettyref
45216 \begin_inset Index idx
45219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 packages ! refstyle
45226 for cross-references, see section
45227 \begin_inset space ~
45231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45233 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45240 \begin_layout Section
45244 \begin_layout Standard
45245 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
45246 Please refer to the section
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_inset space ~
45262 manual for details.
45265 \begin_layout Section
45269 \begin_layout Standard
45270 Modules are explained in section
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45277 reference "subsec:Modules"
45284 \begin_layout Section
45288 \begin_layout Standard
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45296 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
45303 \begin_layout Section
45307 \begin_layout Standard
45308 The document font settings are described in section
45309 \begin_inset space ~
45313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45315 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
45322 \begin_layout Section
45326 \begin_layout Standard
45327 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45344 and whether it should be a
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45352 can also be specified here.
45355 \begin_layout Standard
45356 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
45357 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
45358 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
45360 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
45363 \begin_layout Standard
45366 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
45369 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
45370 justifies the text on screen.
45371 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
45373 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
45377 \begin_layout Standard
45379 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
45388 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
45393 \begin_layout Section
45397 \begin_layout Standard
45398 This dialog is described in sections
45399 \begin_inset space ~
45403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45405 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
45410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45412 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
45419 \begin_layout Section
45423 \begin_layout Standard
45424 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45431 reference "subsec:Margins"
45438 \begin_layout Section
45440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45442 name "sec:Language-encodings"
45447 \begin_inset Index idx
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45451 Language ! Encoding
45459 \begin_layout Standard
45460 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45461 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45462 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45464 is always encoded in utf8).
45465 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45466 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45467 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45468 -command is not known for
45469 a particular character).
45470 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
45474 \begin_layout Standard
45476 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
45477 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45478 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45479 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
45480 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
45481 's default encoding).
45482 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
45483 's Unicode support covers the
45484 characters of most scripts.
45485 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
45486 using one of the traditional, or
45487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45494 , encodings is necessary.
45497 \begin_layout Standard
45499 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
45501 provides support for these traditional encodings.
45504 Traditional (auto-selected)
45510 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
45511 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
45512 the given language(s).
45514 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45518 \begin_layout Standard
45520 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
45521 If you use the option
45526 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45529 If the document contains text in more than one language you
45530 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
45533 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45536 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
45537 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45538 exactly one encoding.
45539 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45544 \begin_layout Standard
45546 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
45547 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
45553 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
45554 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45558 \begin_layout Standard
45560 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
45561 Finally, you can also select
45565 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
45566 Note that this encoding is then used for
45571 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
45572 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45578 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
45581 Do not load inputenc
45583 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
45584 from automatically loading the
45591 \begin_inset Index idx
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45596 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
45598 packages ! inputenc
45604 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
45605 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
45606 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45607 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45608 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45610 Note that this option is only available for the standard
45616 Traditional (auto-selected)
45623 \begin_layout Standard
45625 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
45627 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45628 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45629 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45630 installation supports Unicode), choose
45631 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45632 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45633 is quite incomplete, so
45634 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45639 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45640 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45641 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45642 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45643 -commands is not used, because all
45644 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45645 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45646 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45647 , two new alternative engines
45648 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45650 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45652 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45655 \begin_inset space ~
45663 \begin_inset space ~
45671 \begin_inset space ~
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45683 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45688 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45692 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45697 \begin_layout Standard
45701 \begin_inset space ~
45706 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45707 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45717 The possible settings are:
45720 \begin_layout Description
45721 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45723 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45724 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45728 \begin_inset space ~
45732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45734 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45741 \begin_layout Description
45742 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45743 format you will use.
45744 In many cases this will be
45749 \begin_inset Index idx
45752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45760 If the newer package
45765 \begin_inset Index idx
45768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 packages ! polyglossia
45775 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45776 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45777 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45779 this package will be used instead of
45786 \begin_layout Description
45788 \begin_inset space ~
45799 would be more appropriate.
45802 \begin_layout Description
45803 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45804 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45808 (for German texts), type in
45811 \begin_inset Newline newline
45816 usepackage{ngerman}
45819 \begin_layout Description
45820 None will not use a language package.
45821 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45824 \begin_layout Standard
45825 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45828 \begin_layout Description
45830 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
45832 \begin_inset space ~
45836 \begin_inset space ~
45840 \begin_inset space ~
45847 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45853 \begin_inset Index idx
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 packages ! inputenc
45864 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45865 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45866 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45872 \begin_layout Description
45873 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45875 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45876 commands, which may result in a big
45877 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45878 -commands are needed.
45880 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
45881 This is the same as the
45894 \begin_layout Description
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45900 \begin_inset space ~
45903 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45906 \begin_layout Description
45908 \begin_inset space ~
45912 \begin_inset space ~
45915 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45918 \begin_layout Description
45920 \begin_inset space ~
45923 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45926 \begin_layout Description
45928 \begin_inset space ~
45932 \begin_inset space ~
45935 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45936 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45939 \begin_layout Description
45941 \begin_inset space ~
45945 \begin_inset space ~
45948 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45952 \begin_layout Description
45954 \begin_inset space ~
45958 \begin_inset space ~
45961 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45962 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45965 \begin_layout Description
45967 \begin_inset space ~
45971 \begin_inset space ~
45975 \begin_inset space ~
45978 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45979 \begin_inset space ~
45985 \begin_layout Description
45987 \begin_inset space ~
45991 \begin_inset space ~
45995 \begin_inset space ~
45998 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45999 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46002 \begin_layout Description
46004 \begin_inset space ~
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46011 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46012 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46013 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46014 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46015 \begin_inset space ~
46019 \begin_inset space ~
46025 \begin_layout Description
46027 \begin_inset space ~
46031 \begin_inset space ~
46034 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46035 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46036 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46038 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46039 \begin_inset space ~
46043 \begin_inset space ~
46049 \begin_layout Description
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46055 \begin_inset space ~
46058 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46061 \begin_layout Description
46063 \begin_inset space ~
46067 \begin_inset space ~
46070 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46073 \begin_layout Description
46075 \begin_inset space ~
46079 \begin_inset space ~
46082 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46085 \begin_layout Description
46087 \begin_inset space ~
46090 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46093 \begin_layout Description
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46098 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46101 \begin_layout Description
46103 \begin_inset space ~
46107 \begin_inset space ~
46110 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46113 \begin_layout Description
46115 \begin_inset space ~
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_layout Description
46127 \begin_inset space ~
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46134 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
46137 \begin_layout Description
46139 \begin_inset space ~
46143 \begin_inset space ~
46149 \begin_layout Description
46151 \begin_inset space ~
46155 \begin_inset space ~
46158 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46164 \begin_inset Index idx
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46174 , when using this, set the document language to
46179 \begin_layout Description
46181 \begin_inset space ~
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46188 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46193 , when using this, set the document language to
46196 \begin_inset space ~
46202 \begin_layout Description
46204 \begin_inset space ~
46208 \begin_inset space ~
46211 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46217 \begin_inset Index idx
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46222 packages ! japanese
46227 , when using this, set the document language to
46232 \begin_layout Description
46234 \begin_inset space ~
46238 \begin_inset space ~
46241 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46246 , when using this, set the document language to
46251 \begin_layout Description
46253 \begin_inset space ~
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46260 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46265 , when using this, set the document language to
46270 \begin_layout Description
46272 \begin_inset space ~
46275 (EUC-KR) for Korean
46278 \begin_layout Description
46280 \begin_inset space ~
46284 \begin_inset space ~
46288 \begin_inset space ~
46291 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
46294 \begin_layout Description
46296 \begin_inset space ~
46300 \begin_inset space ~
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46307 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
46308 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
46309 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
46312 \begin_layout Description
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46318 \begin_inset space ~
46324 \begin_layout Description
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46330 \begin_inset space ~
46333 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
46334 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
46337 \begin_layout Description
46339 \begin_inset space ~
46343 \begin_inset space ~
46346 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46352 \begin_inset Index idx
46355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46362 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
46363 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
46365 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46366 with the default encoding (
46368 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46374 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
46375 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46380 \begin_layout Description
46382 \begin_inset space ~
46390 \begin_inset space ~
46393 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
46400 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46403 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46410 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46411 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46413 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46416 \begin_layout Description
46418 \begin_inset space ~
46422 \begin_inset space ~
46425 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46431 \begin_inset Index idx
46434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
46445 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
46447 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
46448 This used to be more comprehensive than
46451 \begin_inset space ~
46456 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
46461 \begin_layout Description
46463 \begin_inset space ~
46466 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46472 \begin_inset Index idx
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46477 packages ! inputenc
46484 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
46485 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
46487 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
46488 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
46489 with the default encoding (
46491 Unicode (utf8) [default]
46497 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
46498 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
46503 \begin_layout Description
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46509 \begin_inset space ~
46513 \begin_inset space ~
46516 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
46517 \begin_inset space ~
46523 \begin_layout Description
46525 \begin_inset space ~
46529 \begin_inset space ~
46533 \begin_inset space ~
46536 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
46537 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
46538 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
46542 \begin_layout Description
46544 \begin_inset space ~
46548 \begin_inset space ~
46552 \begin_inset space ~
46555 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
46556 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
46559 \begin_layout Section
46561 \begin_inset Index idx
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46571 \begin_inset Index idx
46574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 \begin_inset Index idx
46584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46585 Color ! Shaded boxes
46591 \begin_inset Index idx
46594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46595 Color ! Greyed-out notes
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46604 Here you can alter the font color for the
46608 (default: black), for
46611 \begin_inset space ~
46616 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
46620 (default: white) and for
46623 \begin_inset space ~
46633 sets the color back to the default.
46636 \begin_layout Standard
46637 Clicking any button showing
46645 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
46646 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
46647 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
46648 later more quickly.
46651 \begin_layout Standard
46652 Note, if you change the
46655 \begin_inset space ~
46660 font color and use the option
46663 \begin_inset space ~
46668 in the document settings under
46671 \begin_inset space ~
46676 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46677 \begin_inset space ~
46681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46683 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46690 \begin_layout Standard
46691 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46697 \begin_layout Standard
46701 \begin_inset space ~
46710 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46713 \begin_inset space ~
46716 Code after a forced page break:
46719 \begin_layout Itemize
46720 For the page color:
46721 \begin_inset Newline newline
46728 pagecolor{color name}
46731 \begin_layout Itemize
46732 For the text color:
46733 \begin_inset Newline newline
46743 \begin_layout Standard
46744 You are restricted to one of
46780 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46787 \begin_inset space ~
46793 \begin_inset Newline newline
46796 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46797 names to refer to them:
46800 \begin_layout Itemize
46806 \begin_inset Newline newline
46811 page_backgroundcolor
46814 \begin_layout Itemize
46818 \begin_inset space ~
46824 \begin_inset Newline newline
46832 \begin_layout Itemize
46836 \begin_inset space ~
46842 \begin_inset Newline newline
46850 \begin_layout Itemize
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46860 \begin_inset Newline newline
46868 \begin_layout Standard
46869 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46872 \begin_inset space ~
46880 \begin_inset space ~
46888 \begin_layout Section
46890 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
46894 \begin_layout Standard
46896 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
46897 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
46898 \begin_inset space ~
46902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46904 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46912 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
46913 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
46916 \begin_layout Standard
46918 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
46919 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
46921 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
46924 \begin_layout Section
46928 \begin_layout Standard
46929 Here you can adjust the
46933 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46937 as described in section
46938 \begin_inset space ~
46942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46944 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46949 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
46953 \begin_layout Standard
46955 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
46956 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
46958 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
46959 of this package can be used as well.
46960 The most common one are:
46963 \begin_layout Description
46965 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
46966 right Line numbers to the right margin
46969 \begin_layout Description
46971 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
46972 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
46976 \begin_layout Description
46978 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
46979 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
46982 \begin_layout Description
46984 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
46985 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
46988 \begin_layout Description
46990 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46995 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47000 \begin_layout Section
47004 \begin_layout Standard
47005 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47011 \begin_inset Index idx
47014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47016 packages ! biblatex
47026 \begin_inset Index idx
47029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47041 \begin_inset Index idx
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47052 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47055 Sectioned bibliography
47057 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47063 \begin_inset Index idx
47066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47068 packages ! bibtopic
47078 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47079 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47083 for the generation of the bibliography.
47084 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47085 \begin_inset space ~
47089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47091 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47098 \begin_layout Section
47102 \begin_layout Standard
47103 Here you can define the
47107 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47109 \begin_inset space ~
47113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47115 reference "sec:Index"
47122 \begin_layout Section
47126 \begin_layout Standard
47127 The PDF properties are explained in section
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47134 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47141 \begin_layout Section
47145 \begin_layout Standard
47146 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
47147 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47153 \begin_inset Index idx
47156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47168 \begin_inset Index idx
47171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47183 \begin_inset Index idx
47186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47198 \begin_inset Index idx
47201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47213 \begin_inset Index idx
47216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47218 packages ! mathdots
47228 \begin_inset Index idx
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47233 packages ! mathtools
47243 \begin_inset Index idx
47246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47258 \begin_inset Index idx
47261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47263 packages ! stackrel
47273 \begin_inset Index idx
47276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47278 packages ! stmaryrd
47288 \begin_inset Index idx
47291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47293 packages ! undertilde
47298 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
47301 \begin_layout Description
47302 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47303 -errors in formulas,
47304 ensure that you have this enabled.
47307 \begin_layout Description
47308 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
47309 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
47310 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
47314 \begin_layout Description
47315 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
47318 \begin_inset space ~
47330 \begin_layout Description
47331 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47346 \begin_layout Description
47347 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
47358 \begin_layout Description
47359 mathtools is used for the math commands
47395 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
47402 \begin_layout Description
47403 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
47405 Chemical Symbols and Equations
47414 \begin_layout Description
47415 stackrel is used for the math command
47432 \begin_layout Description
47433 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
47436 \begin_layout Description
47437 undertilde is used for the math command
47445 Accents for one Character
47454 \begin_layout Section
47456 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
47458 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
47464 \begin_layout Standard
47466 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
47467 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
47470 \begin_layout Standard
47472 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
47473 The float placement options
47474 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
47477 are described in the section
47480 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
47486 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
47494 \begin_inset space ~
47502 \begin_layout Section
47506 \begin_layout Standard
47507 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
47509 Program Code Listings
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47522 \begin_layout Section
47526 \begin_layout Standard
47527 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
47535 set to be used and set the
47540 The itemize environment is described in section
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47547 reference "sec:Itemize"
47554 \begin_layout Standard
47555 You can furthermore specify a
47558 \begin_inset space ~
47563 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47564 command of the desired character.
47565 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
47572 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
47574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47578 \begin_inset space \space{}
47582 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
47592 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
47593 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
47596 \begin_layout Standard
47597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47605 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47606 -packages in the preamble (menu
47609 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47610 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47613 \begin_inset space ~
47619 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
47623 usepackage{textcomp}
47626 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
47630 usepackage{amssymb}
47640 \begin_layout Section
47644 \begin_layout Standard
47645 Branches are described in section
47646 \begin_inset space ~
47650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47652 reference "sec:Branches"
47659 \begin_layout Section
47661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47663 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
47670 \begin_layout Standard
47671 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
47674 \begin_layout Description
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47680 \begin_inset space ~
47683 Format: The format that is used when you enter
47684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47703 View Master Document
47704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47711 Update Master Document
47712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47719 menu or the toolbar.
47720 The default is set in
47722 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47723 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47725 \begin_inset space ~
47728 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
47732 \begin_inset space ~
47736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47738 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47745 \begin_layout Description
47747 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47760 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
47765 option which is needed with some packages.
47766 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
47767 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
47770 \begin_layout Description
47772 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
47774 \begin_inset space ~
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47781 Options offers settings for the
47789 \begin_layout Itemize
47793 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
47795 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
47797 \begin_inset space ~
47803 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
47805 \begin_inset space ~
47809 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
47815 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
47817 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
47818 settings for the menu
47820 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47824 \begin_inset space ~
47828 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
47831 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
47832 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
47837 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47839 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
47841 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
47844 or a detailed description see section
47846 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47851 \begin_inset space ~
47857 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
47861 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
47865 \begin_layout Itemize
47867 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
47870 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
47872 determines whether so-called
47873 \begin_inset Quotes els
47877 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47881 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
47883 \begin_inset Quotes els
47887 \begin_inset Quotes ers
47890 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47891 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
47892 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
47894 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
47896 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
47897 macros, you can uncheck this.
47898 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
47905 \begin_layout Description
47907 \begin_inset space ~
47911 \begin_inset space ~
47914 Options offers settings for the export format
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47927 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47928 \begin_inset space ~
47931 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47940 settings are described in detail in section
47942 Math Output in XHTML
47947 \begin_inset space ~
47956 \begin_inset space ~
47960 \begin_inset space ~
47965 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47968 \begin_layout Description
47970 \begin_inset space ~
47975 Save transient properties
47977 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47978 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47979 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47983 \begin_layout Itemize
47984 the activation of change tracking
47987 \begin_layout Itemize
47988 the output of tracked changes
47991 \begin_layout Itemize
47992 the recording of the document directory path.
47995 \begin_layout Standard
47996 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47997 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48001 \begin_layout Section
48009 \begin_layout Standard
48010 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48012 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48014 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48016 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48020 \begin_layout Standard
48021 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48022 -syntax is given in section
48023 \begin_inset space ~
48027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48029 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48036 \begin_layout Chapter
48042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48044 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48049 \begin_inset Index idx
48052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48061 \begin_layout Standard
48062 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48064 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48068 It has the following submenus.
48071 \begin_layout Section
48075 \begin_layout Subsection
48079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48080 User Interface File
48081 \begin_inset Index idx
48084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48085 Customization ! of toolbars
48091 \begin_inset Index idx
48094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48095 Customization ! of menus
48103 \begin_layout Standard
48104 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48105 interface (ui) file.
48106 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48114 \begin_layout Description
48119 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48122 \begin_layout Description
48129 the menu entries in popup context menus
48132 \begin_layout Description
48137 specifies the toolbar buttons
48140 \begin_layout Standard
48141 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
48142 and edit the entries.
48145 \begin_layout Standard
48146 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
48158 entries must be finished with an explicit
48183 and in the case of the
48184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48196 The syntax for the entries is:
48199 \begin_layout Standard
48200 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48229 \begin_layout Standard
48231 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48234 All the \SpecialChar LyX
48235 -functions are listed in the menu
48237 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48239 \begin_inset space ~
48247 \begin_layout Standard
48248 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48254 \begin_layout Standard
48255 For example, assuming you use the menu
48257 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48260 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
48264 \begin_layout Standard
48265 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48289 \begin_layout Standard
48291 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
48295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48306 to have the sixth bookmark.
48309 \begin_layout Standard
48313 \begin_inset space ~
48318 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
48319 's toolbar buttons.
48320 The currently available icon sets are compared in
48321 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48324 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
48332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48336 \begin_layout Standard
48339 Enable tool tips in main work area
48341 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
48345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48349 \begin_layout Standard
48354 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
48355 should display in the menu
48357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48359 \begin_inset space ~
48367 \begin_layout Subsection
48371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48375 \begin_layout Standard
48378 Restore window layouts and geometries
48381 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
48382 the last \SpecialChar LyX
48386 \begin_layout Standard
48389 Restore cursor positions
48391 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
48395 \begin_layout Standard
48398 Load opened files from last session
48400 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
48404 \begin_layout Standard
48407 Clear all session information
48409 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
48410 sessions (cursor positions, names
48411 of last opened documents, etc.).
48414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48418 name "subsec:Backup documents"
48423 \begin_inset Index idx
48426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48435 \begin_layout Standard
48438 Backup original documents when saving
48440 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
48441 it was saved the last time.
48442 It is stored in the
48445 \begin_inset space ~
48451 \begin_inset space ~
48455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48457 reference "sec:Paths"
48461 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
48464 \begin_inset space ~
48470 The backup file has the file extension
48471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48485 \begin_layout Standard
48488 Backup documents, every
48490 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
48493 \begin_layout Standard
48496 Save documents compressed by default
48498 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
48499 \begin_inset space ~
48503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48505 reference "subsec:Compressed"
48510 This applies to newly created documents only.
48511 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
48514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48515 Windows & work area
48518 \begin_layout Standard
48521 Open documents in tabs
48523 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48527 \begin_layout Standard
48532 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
48537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48539 \begin_inset space ~
48543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48545 reference "sec:Paths"
48549 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
48556 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
48557 documents will be opened in the same running instance
48558 of \SpecialChar LyX
48560 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
48561 instance is created for each file.
48564 \begin_layout Standard
48567 Single close-tab button
48569 is checked, there will only be one close button (
48579 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
48580 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
48581 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
48585 \begin_layout Standard
48586 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48594 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
48595 before the change takes effect.
48603 \begin_layout Standard
48608 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
48610 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
48612 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48616 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
48617 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
48618 and only want to close the view in once instance.
48621 \begin_layout Subsection
48623 \begin_inset Index idx
48626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48635 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48642 \begin_layout Standard
48643 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
48647 \begin_layout Standard
48648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48656 This section only deals with the fonts
48660 the \SpecialChar LyX
48662 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
48665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48666 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48677 \begin_layout Standard
48678 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
48695 (depends on the system) as its
48698 \begin_inset space ~
48714 \begin_layout Standard
48715 You can change the font size with the
48722 \begin_layout Standard
48727 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
48729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48732 points have the size of 1
48733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48737 \begin_inset space ~
48741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48743 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
48748 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
48749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48753 The sizes are explained in detail in section
48754 \begin_inset space ~
48758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48760 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
48767 \begin_layout Subsection
48769 \begin_inset Index idx
48772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48773 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
48780 \begin_inset Index idx
48783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48792 \begin_layout Standard
48793 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
48794 by choosing an item in the
48795 list and selecting the
48802 \begin_layout Standard
48803 By checking the option
48807 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
48810 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
48811 \begin_inset space ~
48815 \begin_inset space ~
48820 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
48823 \begin_layout Subsection
48825 \begin_inset Index idx
48828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 \begin_layout Standard
48838 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
48842 \begin_layout Standard
48847 enables previewing snippets of your document.
48848 This feature is described in section
48849 \begin_inset space ~
48853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48855 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48862 \begin_layout Standard
48863 Checking the option
48866 \begin_inset space ~
48870 \begin_inset space ~
48874 \begin_inset space ~
48879 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48882 \begin_layout Section
48884 \begin_inset Index idx
48887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48896 \begin_layout Subsection
48900 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48904 \begin_layout Standard
48907 Cursor follows scrollbar
48909 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48913 \begin_layout Standard
48914 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48915 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48916 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48919 \begin_layout Standard
48922 Scroll below end of document
48924 is self-explanatory.
48927 \begin_layout Standard
48928 In \SpecialChar LyX
48929 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48936 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48938 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48939 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48940 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
48944 \begin_layout Standard
48946 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
48949 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
48951 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
48952 paste operations (i.
48953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48956 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
48957 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
48958 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
48959 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
48960 dissolving from insets.
48965 \begin_layout Standard
48968 Sort environments alphabetically
48970 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48973 \begin_layout Standard
48976 Group environments by their category
48978 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48981 \begin_layout Standard
48986 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49001 \begin_layout Standard
49002 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49007 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49008 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49012 \begin_layout Subsection
49014 \begin_inset Index idx
49017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49024 \begin_inset Index idx
49027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49028 Settings ! Shortcuts
49036 \begin_layout Standard
49041 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49043 Several binding files are available, among them:
49046 \begin_layout Description
49047 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49050 \begin_layout Description
49051 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49063 \begin_layout Description
49064 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49075 \begin_layout Standard
49076 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49081 , and binding files for special languages.
49082 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49087 \begin_inset space \space{}
49091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49099 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49100 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49101 will try to use the appropriate binding
49105 \begin_layout Standard
49106 Some binding files, like
49110 , only have a limited scope.
49111 When looking at the end of the file
49115 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49118 \begin_layout Standard
49122 \begin_inset space ~
49126 \begin_inset space ~
49131 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
49132 in the selected key binding file.
49135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49139 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
49144 \begin_inset Index idx
49147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49148 Key Bindings ! Editing
49156 \begin_layout Standard
49157 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
49158 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
49159 functions and the bound shortcuts.
49160 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
49163 Show key-bindings containing
49166 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
49167 Insert there for example as keyword
49168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49175 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
49176 functions that contain
49177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49185 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
49186 All \SpecialChar LyX
49187 functions are also listed in the file
49192 that you will find in the
49199 \begin_layout Standard
49200 For example, to add the shortcut
49208 , select the function and press the
49213 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
49214 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
49217 \begin_layout Standard
49218 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
49219 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
49221 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
49222 function names as a semicolon separated list.
49224 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
49229 \begin_layout Standard
49230 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
49233 \begin_layout Standard
49234 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
49236 The syntax of the entries is:
49239 \begin_layout Standard
49245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49264 \begin_layout Standard
49265 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
49266 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
49267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49294 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
49295 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
49296 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
49297 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
49299 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
49303 , you needed to specify it as
49308 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
49311 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
49314 \begin_layout Subsection
49316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49318 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
49323 \begin_inset Index idx
49326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49333 \begin_inset Index idx
49336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49337 Settings ! Keyboard Map
49345 \begin_layout Standard
49346 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
49347 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
49348 provides keyboard maps.
49349 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
49350 is a Romanian one, you can enable
49353 \begin_inset space ~
49357 \begin_inset space ~
49362 and select the keyboard map file named
49369 \begin_layout Standard
49378 keyboard map and, if you use the
49382 bindings, you can select the first and second with
49385 arg "keymap-primary"
49391 arg "keymap-secondary"
49394 respectively or toggle between them with
49397 arg "keymap-toggle"
49403 \begin_layout Standard
49404 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49412 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
49421 \begin_layout Standard
49422 You can also specify the mouse
49424 Wheel scrolling speed
49427 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
49431 Middle mouse button pasting
49433 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
49434 inserts the content of the clipboard.
49437 \begin_layout Standard
49445 \begin_inset space ~
49449 \begin_inset space ~
49454 you can select a key for zooming.
49455 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
49458 \begin_layout Subsection
49462 \begin_layout Standard
49463 Input completion is described in section
49464 \begin_inset space ~
49468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49470 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
49477 \begin_layout Section
49479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49486 \begin_inset Index idx
49489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49496 \begin_inset Index idx
49499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49508 \begin_layout Standard
49509 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
49510 are normally determined during
49512 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
49515 \begin_layout Description
49517 \begin_inset space ~
49520 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
49521 's working directory.
49522 It is the default when you
49533 \begin_inset space ~
49541 \begin_layout Description
49543 \begin_inset space ~
49546 templates This directory
49547 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
49548 contains the templates that are shown
49549 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
49550 will be opened when you use the menu
49551 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
49556 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49558 \begin_inset space ~
49562 \begin_inset space ~
49570 \begin_layout Description
49572 \begin_inset space ~
49575 files This directory
49576 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
49577 will be opened when you use the
49578 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
49579 contains the example files that are listed in
49582 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
49591 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49593 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
49595 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
49601 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
49603 \begin_inset Newline newline
49607 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49619 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
49620 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
49630 \begin_layout Description
49632 \begin_inset space ~
49636 \begin_inset Index idx
49639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49645 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
49646 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
49647 \begin_inset space ~
49651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49653 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49661 will be used to save the backups.
49662 \begin_inset Newline newline
49665 Backup files have the ending
49666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49676 \begin_layout Description
49678 \begin_inset space ~
49681 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
49682 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
49684 \begin_inset Newline newline
49691 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49697 You can edit this file with the program
49706 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
49707 in its preferences under
49710 \begin_inset space ~
49716 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
49721 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
49723 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
49724 in your \SpecialChar LyX
49730 and \SpecialChar LyX
49731 need to be running the same time.
49732 \begin_inset Newline newline
49735 The pipe is also used for the
49739 feature, see section
49740 \begin_inset space ~
49744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49746 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
49751 \begin_inset Newline newline
49754 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
49755 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
49756 \begin_inset Newline newline
49772 \begin_layout Description
49774 \begin_inset space ~
49777 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
49780 \begin_layout Description
49782 \begin_inset space ~
49785 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
49786 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
49787 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
49790 \begin_layout Description
49792 \begin_inset space ~
49795 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
49801 You only need to specify it if you are using
49805 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
49807 For \SpecialChar LyX
49812 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
49816 \begin_layout Description
49818 \begin_inset space ~
49821 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
49822 When \SpecialChar LyX
49823 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
49824 to find it on the system.
49825 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
49827 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
49829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49836 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
49837 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
49840 \begin_layout Description
49842 \begin_inset space ~
49845 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
49846 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
49847 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
49848 code or in the document
49850 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
49852 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
49853 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
49854 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
49855 scanned for the input files.
49856 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
49857 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
49859 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
49860 compilation may fail for some documents.
49863 \begin_layout Section
49867 \begin_layout Standard
49868 Here you can insert your
49877 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
49879 \begin_inset space ~
49883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49885 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49889 , to mark changes you make as yours.
49892 \begin_layout Section
49894 \begin_inset Index idx
49897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49898 Language ! Settings
49904 \begin_inset Index idx
49907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49908 Settings ! Language
49916 \begin_layout Subsection
49918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49920 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49927 \begin_layout Description
49929 \begin_inset space ~
49933 \begin_inset space ~
49936 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49938 You can find its actual translation status here:
49939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49941 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49947 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
49951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49953 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
49954 LaTeX Language Support
49959 \begin_layout Description
49961 \begin_inset space ~
49964 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49965 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49966 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49967 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49984 The most widespread language package is
49989 \begin_inset Index idx
49992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49999 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50001 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50002 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50003 come with the alternative
50009 \begin_inset Index idx
50012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50014 packages ! polyglossia
50019 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50020 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50026 The available selections are described in section
50027 \begin_inset space ~
50031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50033 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50040 \begin_layout Description
50042 \begin_inset space ~
50046 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50047 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50048 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50050 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50054 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50058 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50060 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50064 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50065 that is used to switch to a different language
50066 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50067 to start the package
50071 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50072 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50076 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50077 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50080 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50092 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50100 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50103 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50105 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50127 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50128 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50135 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
50136 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50141 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
50146 , this setting is ignored.
50151 \begin_layout Description
50153 \begin_inset space ~
50157 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
50164 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
50165 Use this if the language switch set in
50169 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
50173 's alternative command
50177 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
50178 \SpecialChar allowbreak
50181 end{otherlanguage*}
50185 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
50186 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
50187 command toggles the package on and off
50188 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
50189 Empty by default, as
50193 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50195 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
50200 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50206 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
50211 , this setting is ignored.
50216 \begin_layout Description
50218 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50220 \begin_inset space ~
50224 \begin_inset space ~
50227 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
50231 \begin_layout Description
50233 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
50235 \begin_inset space ~
50239 \begin_inset space ~
50242 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50248 \begin_layout Description
50250 \begin_inset space ~
50254 \begin_inset space ~
50258 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
50260 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
50263 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
50264 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
50267 to the document class options
50268 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
50269 rather than the language package options.
50270 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
50274 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
50275 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
50277 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
50278 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
50280 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
50285 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
50286 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
50295 \begin_layout Description
50297 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
50299 \begin_inset space ~
50303 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
50305 \begin_inset space ~
50309 \begin_inset space ~
50313 \begin_inset space ~
50319 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
50321 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
50324 this option is set,
50325 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
50326 the language switch defined in
50329 \begin_inset space ~
50334 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
50335 to the document language.
50336 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
50337 This might be needed if you use a non-default
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50345 or if a package resets the document language.
50346 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
50347 usually should be the document language).
50348 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
50349 documents start with the chosen document language.
50350 When this option is not set, the
50353 \begin_inset space ~
50358 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50360 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50373 \begin_layout Description
50375 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
50377 \begin_inset space ~
50381 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
50383 \begin_inset space ~
50387 \begin_inset space ~
50391 \begin_inset space ~
50397 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
50401 \begin_inset space ~
50405 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
50406 Set document language explicitly
50412 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
50414 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
50420 \begin_inset space ~
50426 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
50428 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
50432 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
50434 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
50437 the end of the document.
50438 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
50442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50443 \paragraph_spacing single
50445 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
50451 \begin_layout Description
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50457 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
50459 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
50463 \begin_inset space ~
50467 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
50469 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
50471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
50475 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
50478 in a language different
50479 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
50481 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
50484 the document language will be
50485 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
50486 marked (by default with a blue
50489 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
50491 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
50495 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
50499 \begin_layout Description
50501 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
50503 \begin_inset space ~
50507 \begin_inset space ~
50511 \begin_inset space ~
50514 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
50515 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
50516 switched via the operating system.
50517 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
50519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50522 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
50523 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
50528 \begin_layout Description
50530 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50536 \begin_inset space ~
50539 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
50540 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
50545 \begin_layout Description
50547 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50549 \begin_inset space ~
50553 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
50555 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
50559 \begin_inset space ~
50563 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
50564 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
50565 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
50567 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
50571 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
50573 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
50574 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
50576 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50577 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
50578 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
50580 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
50585 \begin_layout Standard
50590 means that the cursor
50591 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
50592 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
50593 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
50595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50598 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
50599 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
50603 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
50605 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
50606 specific case always means: move
50610 in text (even if this means:
50616 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50617 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
50618 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
50619 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
50620 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
50621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50632 \begin_layout Standard
50634 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
50639 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
50640 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
50641 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
50645 ) when coming from the left.
50646 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
50648 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
50649 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
50650 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
50655 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50657 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
50661 \begin_layout Description
50663 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
50665 \begin_inset space ~
50669 \begin_inset space ~
50672 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
50673 separator alignment).
50674 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
50676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50679 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
50680 (static) custom character here.
50683 \begin_layout Description
50685 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
50687 \begin_inset space ~
50691 \begin_inset space ~
50694 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
50700 \begin_layout Subsection
50704 \begin_layout Standard
50705 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
50706 \begin_inset space ~
50710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50712 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
50719 \begin_layout Section
50723 \begin_layout Subsection
50725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50727 name "subsec:General-output"
50734 \begin_layout Description
50736 \begin_inset space ~
50739 search Commands that will be used for the menu
50741 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50743 \begin_inset space ~
50749 For a detailed description see section
50751 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50756 \begin_inset space ~
50764 \begin_layout Description
50766 \begin_inset space ~
50769 Options Options for the program
50773 that is used for the export format
50778 \begin_inset space ~
50782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50784 reference "subsec:Export"
50789 Possible options are listed in the
50794 \begin_inset Newline newline
50798 \begin_inset Flex URL
50801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50803 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
50813 \begin_layout Description
50815 \begin_inset space ~
50819 \begin_inset space ~
50822 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
50825 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50826 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
50828 \begin_inset space ~
50834 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
50837 \begin_layout Description
50839 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
50841 \begin_inset space ~
50845 \begin_inset Index idx
50848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50855 \begin_inset Index idx
50858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50859 Settings ! Date format
50864 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
50865 \begin_inset Newline newline
50869 \begin_inset Flex URL
50872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50874 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
50880 \begin_inset Newline newline
50883 For example the format
50884 \begin_inset Newline newline
50888 \begin_inset Newline newline
50891 prints the date as day/month/year.
50896 \begin_layout Description
50898 \begin_inset space ~
50902 \begin_inset space ~
50905 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
50906 is allowed to overwrite on export.
50909 \begin_layout Subsection
50915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50917 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
50922 \begin_inset Index idx
50925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50926 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
50935 \begin_layout Description
50937 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
50939 \begin_inset space ~
50947 \begin_inset space ~
50951 \begin_inset space ~
50954 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
50959 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
50980 are used for Cyrillic.
50981 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
50982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50994 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
50996 sets up in the background.
50997 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51002 \begin_layout Description
51004 \begin_inset space ~
51008 \begin_inset space ~
51012 \begin_inset space ~
51016 \begin_inset space ~
51019 options They only have an effect when the program
51023 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51026 \begin_layout Standard
51027 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51028 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51029 manuals of the applications.
51032 \begin_layout Description
51034 \begin_inset space ~
51037 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51038 \begin_inset space ~
51042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51044 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51051 \begin_layout Description
51053 \begin_inset space ~
51056 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51057 \begin_inset space ~
51061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51063 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51070 \begin_layout Description
51072 \begin_inset space ~
51075 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51076 \begin_inset space ~
51080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51082 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51089 \begin_layout Description
51095 \begin_inset space ~
51098 command Command for the program
51100 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51103 that is described in the section
51105 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51110 Additional Features
51115 \begin_layout Standard
51116 There are additionally the following options:
51119 \begin_layout Description
51121 \begin_inset space ~
51125 \begin_inset space ~
51129 \begin_inset space ~
51133 \begin_inset space ~
51138 \begin_inset space ~
51141 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
51142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51159 to separate folders.
51160 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
51162 \begin_inset Index idx
51165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51172 \begin_inset Index idx
51175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51184 \begin_layout Description
51186 \begin_inset space ~
51190 \begin_inset space ~
51194 \begin_inset space ~
51198 \begin_inset space ~
51202 \begin_inset space ~
51206 \begin_inset space ~
51209 changes Removes all manually set
51215 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51216 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51218 \begin_inset space ~
51223 dialog when changing the document class.
51226 \begin_layout Section
51228 \begin_inset space ~
51232 \begin_inset Index idx
51235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51244 \begin_layout Subsection
51246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51248 name "subsec:Converters"
51253 \begin_inset Index idx
51256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51265 \begin_layout Standard
51266 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
51267 from one format to another.
51268 You can modify converters or create new ones.
51269 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
51276 \begin_inset space ~
51281 field and press the
51286 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
51290 \begin_inset space ~
51295 drop-down list, modify the
51299 field and press the
51306 \begin_layout Standard
51309 Converter File Cache
51315 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
51317 Maximum Age (in days
51320 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
51321 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
51324 \begin_layout Standard
51325 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
51326 definition, is described in the section
51337 \begin_layout Subsection
51339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51341 name "sec:File-Formats"
51346 \begin_inset Index idx
51349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51356 \begin_inset Index idx
51359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51368 \begin_layout Standard
51369 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
51379 programs that should be used for certain formats.
51382 \begin_layout Standard
51383 You can also define the
51385 Default output format
51387 that is used when you use
51389 View, Update, View Master Document
51393 Update Master Document
51399 menu or the toolbar.
51402 \begin_layout Standard
51403 More about formats and their options is described in the section
51414 \begin_layout Standard
51415 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
51417 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
51418 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
51419 This is done by specifying a
51424 More about this is described in the section
51435 \begin_layout Chapter
51436 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51438 \begin_inset Index idx
51441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51450 name "chap:Units-available-in"
51457 \begin_layout Standard
51459 \begin_inset space ~
51463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51465 reference "tab:Units"
51469 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
51470 and used in this documentation.
51473 \begin_layout Standard
51474 \begin_inset Float table
51481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51482 \begin_inset Caption Standard
51484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51500 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
51506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51508 \begin_inset Tabular
51509 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
51510 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
51511 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51512 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
51513 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51666 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
51670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51864 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51937 scaled point (65536
51938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
51982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
51995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52005 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52129 % of original image width
52134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52218 \begin_layout Standard
52219 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
52222 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
52229 \begin_layout Bibliography
52230 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52231 LatexCommand bibitem
52238 The \SpecialChar LyX
52240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52243 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
52249 \begin_inset Newline newline
52253 \begin_inset Flex URL
52256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52258 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
52266 \begin_layout Bibliography
52267 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52268 LatexCommand bibitem
52269 key "latexcompanion"
52274 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
52276 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52277 Companion Second Edition.
52280 Addison-Wesley, 2004
52283 \begin_layout Bibliography
52284 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52285 LatexCommand bibitem
52291 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
52294 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
52298 Addison-Wesley, 2003
52301 \begin_layout Bibliography
52302 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52303 LatexCommand bibitem
52312 : A Document Preparation System.
52315 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
52318 \begin_layout Bibliography
52319 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52320 LatexCommand bibitem
52330 The \SpecialChar TeX
52334 Addison-Wesley, 1984
52337 \begin_layout Bibliography
52338 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52339 LatexCommand bibitem
52345 The \SpecialChar TeX
52347 \begin_inset Newline newline
52351 \begin_inset Flex URL
52354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52356 https://ctan.org/topic
52364 \begin_layout Bibliography
52365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52366 LatexCommand bibitem
52372 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
52374 \begin_inset Newline newline
52378 \begin_inset Flex URL
52381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52383 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
52391 \begin_layout Bibliography
52392 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52393 LatexCommand bibitem
52400 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52402 name "Documentation"
52403 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
52410 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52414 \begin_inset Newline newline
52418 \begin_inset Flex URL
52421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52423 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
52431 \begin_layout Bibliography
52432 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52433 LatexCommand bibitem
52440 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52442 name "Documentation"
52443 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
52448 how to use the program
52450 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52454 \begin_inset Newline newline
52458 \begin_inset Flex URL
52461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52463 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
52471 \begin_layout Bibliography
52472 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52473 LatexCommand bibitem
52480 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52482 name "Documentation"
52483 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
52488 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52494 \begin_inset Index idx
52497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52499 packages ! biblatex
52505 \begin_inset Newline newline
52509 \begin_inset Flex URL
52512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52514 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
52522 \begin_layout Bibliography
52523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52524 LatexCommand bibitem
52531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52533 name "Documentation"
52534 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
52539 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52545 \begin_inset Index idx
52548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52556 \begin_inset Newline newline
52560 \begin_inset Flex URL
52563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52565 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
52573 \begin_layout Bibliography
52574 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52575 LatexCommand bibitem
52582 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52584 name "Documentation"
52585 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
52595 \begin_inset Newline newline
52599 \begin_inset Flex URL
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52604 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
52612 \begin_layout Bibliography
52613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52614 LatexCommand bibitem
52615 key "makeindex-man"
52621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52624 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
52634 \begin_inset Newline newline
52638 \begin_inset Flex URL
52641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52643 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
52651 \begin_layout Bibliography
52652 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52653 LatexCommand bibitem
52660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52662 name "Documentation"
52663 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
52673 \begin_inset Newline newline
52677 \begin_inset Flex URL
52680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52682 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
52690 \begin_layout Bibliography
52691 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52692 LatexCommand bibitem
52699 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52701 name "Documentation"
52702 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
52707 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
52709 \begin_inset Newline newline
52713 \begin_inset Flex URL
52716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52718 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
52726 \begin_layout Bibliography
52727 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52728 LatexCommand bibitem
52735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52737 name "Documentation"
52738 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
52743 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52749 \begin_inset Index idx
52752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52760 \begin_inset Newline newline
52764 \begin_inset Flex URL
52767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52769 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
52777 \begin_layout Bibliography
52778 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52779 LatexCommand bibitem
52786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52788 name "Documentation"
52789 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
52794 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52800 \begin_inset Index idx
52803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52805 packages ! enumitem
52811 \begin_inset Newline newline
52815 \begin_inset Flex URL
52818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52820 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
52828 \begin_layout Bibliography
52829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52830 LatexCommand bibitem
52837 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52839 name "Documentation"
52840 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
52845 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52851 \begin_inset Index idx
52854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52856 packages ! fancyhdr
52862 \begin_inset Newline newline
52866 \begin_inset Flex URL
52869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52871 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
52879 \begin_layout Bibliography
52880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52881 LatexCommand bibitem
52888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52890 name "Documentation"
52891 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
52896 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52902 \begin_inset Index idx
52905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52907 packages ! hyperref
52913 \begin_inset Newline newline
52917 \begin_inset Flex URL
52920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52922 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
52930 \begin_layout Bibliography
52931 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52932 LatexCommand bibitem
52939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52941 name "Documentation"
52942 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
52947 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52953 \begin_inset Index idx
52956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52958 packages ! microtype
52964 \begin_inset Newline newline
52968 \begin_inset Flex URL
52971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52973 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
52981 \begin_layout Bibliography
52982 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
52983 LatexCommand bibitem
52990 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52992 name "Documentation"
52993 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
52998 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53004 \begin_inset Index idx
53007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53015 \begin_inset Newline newline
53019 \begin_inset Flex URL
53022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53024 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53032 \begin_layout Bibliography
53033 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53034 LatexCommand bibitem
53041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53043 name "Documentation"
53044 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53049 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53055 \begin_inset Index idx
53058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53060 packages ! prettyref
53066 \begin_inset Newline newline
53070 \begin_inset Flex URL
53073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53075 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53083 \begin_layout Bibliography
53084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53085 LatexCommand bibitem
53092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53094 name "Documentation"
53095 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53100 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53106 \begin_inset Index idx
53109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53111 packages ! refstyle
53117 \begin_inset Newline newline
53121 \begin_inset Flex URL
53124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53126 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
53134 \begin_layout Bibliography
53135 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53136 LatexCommand bibitem
53143 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53146 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
53151 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53153 \begin_inset Newline newline
53157 \begin_inset Flex URL
53160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53162 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
53170 \begin_layout Bibliography
53171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53172 LatexCommand bibitem
53179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53182 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
53187 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53189 \begin_inset Newline newline
53193 \begin_inset Flex URL
53196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53198 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
53206 \begin_layout Bibliography
53207 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53208 LatexCommand bibitem
53215 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53218 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
53223 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53224 for Cyrillic languages:
53225 \begin_inset Newline newline
53229 \begin_inset Flex URL
53232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53234 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
53242 \begin_layout Bibliography
53243 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53244 LatexCommand bibitem
53251 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53254 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
53259 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53261 \begin_inset Newline newline
53265 \begin_inset Flex URL
53268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53270 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
53278 \begin_layout Bibliography
53279 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53280 LatexCommand bibitem
53287 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53290 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
53295 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53297 \begin_inset Newline newline
53301 \begin_inset Flex URL
53304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53306 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
53314 \begin_layout Bibliography
53315 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53316 LatexCommand bibitem
53323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53326 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
53331 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
53333 \begin_inset Newline newline
53337 \begin_inset Flex URL
53340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53342 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
53350 \begin_layout Standard
53351 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53385 \begin_inset Note Note
53388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53395 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
53396 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
53397 bibliography is the second one:
53405 \begin_layout Standard
53406 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
53407 LatexCommand bibtex
53408 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
53409 options "biblio/alphadin"
53416 \begin_layout Standard
53417 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53421 \begin_layout Standard
53425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53431 pagedeclaration}[1]{
53434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53440 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
53448 \begin_inset Note Note
53451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53452 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
53453 \begin_inset space ~
53457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53459 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
53471 \begin_layout Standard
53472 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
53473 LatexCommand printnomenclature
53479 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
53480 LatexCommand printindex